JP2019022634A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To perform an appropriate shooting promotion notification.SOLUTION: A shooting promotion notification (e.g., a display of a right shooting display) can be performed for promoting a shooting operation of game media (e.g., game balls) to a prescribed path (e.g., the right side of a game area 7). In doing so, if controlled in a special state, the shooting promotion notification can be performed in a prescribed mode (e.g., displaying a character display of a large size "Shoot right side!" at the lower center of the display screen of a presentation display device 9). On the basis of a variable display period being equal to or longer than a prescribed period (e.g., a variable display with a ready-to-win), during a performance of a variable display, the shooting promotion notification can be performed in a specific mode different from the prescribed mode (e.g., a change from the character display of the large size "Shoot right side!" to a character display of a small size "Shoot right side!").SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control to a special state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and to a special state with increased frequency of being controlled to the special state. Some are configured to be controllable. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses that variable display of first identification information (first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (second special symbol) can be executed simultaneously, and right-handed gaming is performed during a normal gaming state. It is described that the configuration is such that the number of small hit games is increased when a right-handed game is continuously performed during a high-probability gaming state than when it is performed continuously. Further, in Patent Document 1, in the gaming machine configured as described above, the first variable winning portion and the variable starting portion are arranged on the right side of the gaming area, and after the start of the high probability gaming state, the upper right corner of the display portion. It is described that a firing promotion notification (right-handed image) that prompts the player to make a right-handed game is displayed on the part.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-086643 (paragraph 0237, paragraph 0512, paragraph 0786, FIG. 1, FIG. 61)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the mode of launch promotion notification is uniform when controlled to a special state, and appropriate launch promotion notification cannot always be executed.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing appropriate launch promotion notification.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is capable of performing variable display. First, special state control means (for example, steps S359 to S361 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player. And a special state control means (for example, steps S2208A, S2214A, S2218A, S2220A in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, the KT state) whose frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased. , Steps S2208B, S2214B, S2218B, S2220B ) And a launch promotion notification (e.g., display of a right-handed display) for promoting a launch operation of a game medium (e.g., a game ball) to a predetermined route (e.g., to the right of the game area 7). Notification means (for example, a portion of the production control microcomputer 200 for executing steps S626, S639, S650, and S655), and the firing promotion notifying means promotes firing in a predetermined manner when controlled to a special state. (For example, the production control microcomputer 200 executes step S655, and as shown in FIG. 62A, a large-size “right-handed” is displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the production display device 9. ! ”Is displayed), and a specific mode different from the predetermined mode during execution of the variable display based on the fact that the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period. (For example, the production control microcomputer 200 executes step S924 when Y is determined in step S922, and, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a large-size “right-handed!”). The character display is changed to a small-size “right-handed!” Character display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate firing promotion notification by changing the mode of firing promotion notification depending on the type of variable display.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the firing promotion notification means derives a predetermined display result that does not correspond to the operation of the variable device as the display result of the variable display when the firing promotion notification is executed in a specific manner during execution of the variable display. Based on the display, it is possible to change the specific mode to the predetermined mode and execute the firing promotion notification (for example, the production control microcomputer 200 executes step S998B, as shown in FIG. 62C). In addition, when the background symbol is stopped as a stop symbol, the small size “right-handed!” Character display is changed to the large-sized “right-handed!” Character display). Also good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the mode of firing promotion notification at an appropriate timing.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the special state control means includes a first special state (for example, a first KT state) as a special state and a second special state having a higher advantage than the first special state ( For example, when the second promotion state is controlled to the second special state, the launch promotion notification means is controlled in the special state different from the case where it is controlled to the second special state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, a small-size “right-handed” character display is displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9). Also good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the change in the aspect of the firing promotion notification when controlled to the second special state stand out.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the firing promotion notifying means has a variable display period of a predetermined period or longer (for example, a variable display with reach) or a variable display. As a result, launch promotion notification can be executed in a specific manner during execution of variable display based on the display result corresponding to the fact that it is not controlled in a special state (for example, it is not a variable display that is a small hit) (For example, the production control microcomputer 200 executes step S924 when Y in step S922 or N in step S923). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute launch promotion notification in a specific manner corresponding to a period during which no profit is obtained.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the firing promotion notification means can execute the firing promotion notification in a specific manner during execution of variable display when a predetermined effect (for example, reach) is executed. As a specific mode, the firing promotion notification can be executed in a mode in which the degree of recognition is lower than the predetermined mode (for example, as shown in FIG. It may be configured to be changed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect while prompting the player to stop the launch operation.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st grand prize opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of a game state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory operating process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a process at the time of reception of a definite command. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol process process. It is a flowchart shown about an instruction | indication alerting | reporting control process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a display in the effect display apparatus in a high probability / 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a display in the effect display apparatus in a high probability / 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a display of the right-handed display in a high probability / 2nd KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a display of a full tank error alert | report. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction | indication alert | report in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction | indication alert | report in this Embodiment. It is a timing chart when the big hit gaming state is finished and controlled to the first KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display process in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production in a modification. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the production timing of the production | presentation in the small hit game in the 2nd KT state in a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) 1 as seen from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. Also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition that is the first execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter, referred to as a first variable display portion 9a) for variably displaying an effect decoration pattern (first decoration pattern) and displaying a display result, and establishment of a second start condition that is a second execution condition A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative designs (second decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other based on (for example, that the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) and deriving and displaying the display result (Hereinafter referred to as the second variable display portion 9b) and a display area (hereinafter referred to as background pattern) that allows the player to visually recognize the display contents more easily than the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b. Display unit 9c). Note that easy to visually recognize the display content is, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display content in the variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b is always monochromatic. The display color may change. In this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c controls the display of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as a background symbol) in the three display areas of left, middle, and right. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping and displaying the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect part 9c is provided for two variable display parts (first variable display part 9a and second variable display part 9b). Since an effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the two variable display portions is executed, the decorative symbol status (for example, whether the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) It is difficult to grasp whether or not. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing symbol variation display for the effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. .

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided an effect movable member 78 that can be operated in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is operated by driving the movable member motor 78 a by the production control microcomputer 200. An origin position sensor 78b for detecting that the movable member 78 is at the origin position is also provided on the left side of the effect display device 9.

  A first special symbol display device (a special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b that variably display special symbols as identification information are provided on the top of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. Has been. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the number of the first reserved memory (the stored memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of reserved memories. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The first variable display section 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol (for production) during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. Further, the second variable display section 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 9a is sometimes referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 9b is sometimes referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be collectively referred to as a decorative design. Note that the type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative design includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than the numbers, and the second decorative design is a character other than the numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative design. Different characters may be included.

  On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of effective winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the number of effective winning balls entered into the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. There is an area (hereinafter referred to as symbol hold storage display unit 18c) that displays the total number (the total number of hold storage). As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold memory display 18a and the second special symbol hold memory display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold memory display unit 18c, respectively. Although configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display of another aspect may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is composed of one display, and the display color is different according to the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. I will let you.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit 18c increases the number of display areas to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Or among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as the effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Accordingly, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. When the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are an example. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. An operation gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the operating gate 17 is detected by the operating gate switch 17a.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the operation gate 17. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the large winning opening as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Below the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, there are provided a special variable winning ball apparatus 22 for forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits, and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 having a second start winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side. Although details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and are formed as plate-shaped bottom surfaces that are formed as the bottom surfaces of the flow paths through which the game balls flow down. By moving the member back and forth in the front-rear direction, the game ball is won in an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win in the special winning port 24 or the second start winning port 14 located below the bottom member. It is changed to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forwardly in the small hit gaming state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. From the closed state, the bottom member is moved backwards backward to execute the opening control for opening the special winning opening 24 that becomes the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, An opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening 14 that becomes a winning area.

  In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, so that the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first drops onto the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second start winning port 14 is open, The game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is moved backward to open the special winning hole 24, the game ball wins the special winning hole 24. Furthermore, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 and falls to the out opening 26 as it is.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 has a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

  In the special winning opening 24, a switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special winning opening 24 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the gaming ball has won the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) through another prize opening, such as the first start prize opening 13a and the second start prize opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 24 is opened, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is in a closed state, the game balls cannot be passed through (entered) into the special winning opening 24, so that a prize ball cannot be obtained. It becomes disadvantageous for the person.

  Further, a second start opening switch 14 a capable of detecting a game ball won in the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the second start winning opening 14. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning port 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special winning ball device). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state to be described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and performs a launch operation (so-called right Hitting operation).

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is configured to be 0.6 seconds or longer. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball apparatus 32 and the nail group that forms the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be controlled to open based on the game ball passing through the gate 32. In the first KT state described later, the game ball is gate 32. The time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after passing through is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball passes from the gate 32 until reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since the required time is shorter than 0.6 seconds, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the one game ball is The variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be won as it is.

  Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball lamp 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 5, a game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends) The first start condition is satisfied), variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display unit 8a, and variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display unit 9a. Be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total reserved memory number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c Increase by one.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display) Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display unit 8b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second variable display unit 9b. The variable display starts. In other words, the second special symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the total reserved memory number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Increase by one. However, even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol reserved memory display portion 18c is increased by one.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls have won the big winning opening. One round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins a big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the big prize opening or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, and 16 rounds). A V winning area may be provided at the special winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on the condition that the hit ball has won the V winning area while the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened. Note that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the types of big hits are 2R normal big hit, 2R positive big hit, 6R normal big hit, 6R positive big hit, and 16R positive big hit. If a state is given and a 6R normal jackpot or 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot gaming state is awarded, and if a 16R probability jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is awarded.

  When it is decided to change the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stoppage of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a to a jackpot symbol with probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, “7”, etc.) Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variation symbol and the probability transition state is entered, not only the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 8a becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

  When the second special symbol display unit 8b determines that the stop symbol at the time when the second special symbol fluctuates is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol and shifts to a probable variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the second start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the first start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, when the second special symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game proceeds to the small hit gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened until a certain time has passed so that a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. Thereby, although it is less than a big hit game state also in a small hit game state, it is set as the open aspect which a player can obtain a ball.

  In the probability variation state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are the jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example, , The odd number of 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

  Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) In some cases, the control is performed with high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  Of the KT states, the first KT state, as will be described later, is likely to cause a small hit, but the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the 1st KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is increased. In the KT state, the second KT state, as will be described later, has a short opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15, and when a small hit occurs, a game ball is placed in the downstream special variable winning ball device 22. Easy to win. Specifically, in the 2nd KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is shortened.

  The probability variation state is a gaming state that tends to be a big hit than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is generated more than the low probability state. The gaming state is easy to play.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state at the normal time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. In addition, it is configured so that a small hit may not be determined when the first special symbol fluctuates, whereas a small hit may be determined when the second special symbol fluctuates. Therefore, the KT state is a gaming state that tends to be a smaller hit than the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as a structure for making the KT state into a gaming state that is easier to hit than the normal state, it is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 will be in the open state per normal symbol is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher rate of variation with respect to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a gaming state that tends to be a small hit.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 9a. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

  Further, when the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that recalls the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

  In the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing a reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during variable display. Although there are exceptions as will be described later, basically when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. Displayed (the background symbols are finally stopped in the three display areas). If the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left Three background symbols with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such background symbols are also referred to as jackpot symbols.

  When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c.

  When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is delayed. When the special symbol for which variable display ends is stopped and displayed, variable display of the background symbol ends.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for a background symbol that has not stopped yet when the stopped background symbol constitutes part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) And all or some of the background symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background symbol display unit 9c. The display area in the middle is in a state where the variable display is still being performed, and the state in which all or part of the display area is synchronously displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the background) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 9c, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display unit 9c are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) is displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (a ground color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) Etc.) may be changed (for example, color).

  Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the variable winning prize is only slightly smaller than the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 includes a base plate portion 101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is fixedly supported by the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In a substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball apparatus 15) that opens toward the front is formed and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. A slit-like accommodation hole 102 that is long in the left-right direction for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward is formed above the opening 24. Has been. In the present embodiment, the special prize opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side slightly from the center in the left-right direction of the base plate portion 101, but may be on the left or right side.

  The bottom member 23 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is inclined downward to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 23 can be moved forward and backward in the forwardly moved state shown in FIG. 3 and the backwardly moved state shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom surface member 23 is located on the back side (backward) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) for moving the vehicle forward and backward is disposed.

  Returning to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, a flow path forming base part 112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate part 101. An upstream channel portion 113 that is continuous with the upstream region 23U that is the upper side end portion (right end portion) of the bottom surface member 23 and the bottom surface member 23 in the longitudinal direction, and that forms a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 23; A downstream region 23L that is a lower side end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 23 and a downstream flow path portion 114 that forms a flow path of a game ball together with the bottom surface member 23 are formed in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 23. Yes.

  In addition, the upper part of the flow path forming base 112 is recessed downward from the end on the bottom surface member 23 side of the upstream flow path part 113 and the downstream flow path part 114, and the special winning opening 24 is left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 is formed to guide the game ball dropped below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 so as to surround from below.

  The upstream-side channel portion 113 and the downstream-side channel portion 114 are formed so as to incline to the left so that the game ball can flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide channel portion 115 extends to the left toward the special winning opening 24 and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. In the recessed space at the bottom of the guide channel portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball backward toward the special prize opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is disposed. ing.

  Furthermore, the front part (player side) of the flow path forming base part 112 is integrally formed with a covering part 117 that covers the upstream flow path part 113, the downstream flow path part 114, and the guide flow path part 115 from the front. Has been. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream flow passage portion 113, the downstream flow passage portion 114, and the guide flow passage portion 115 from the front, so that the game balls flowing down these flow passage portions jump to the glass door frame 4 side. It has a function to prevent it. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base 112, but may be fixed separately.

  In the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, a flow of game balls that are connected in the left-right direction, including the upstream flow path portion 113, the bottom surface member 23, and the downstream flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. A path F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces 118 that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

  In the present embodiment, the restricting piece 118 is formed integrally with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding backward from the covering portion 117. When there is no restriction piece 118, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the longitudinal component by interfering with Than delay. These regulating pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. In addition, the restriction piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent ones. Yes. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one restriction piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream-side passage portion 113 from the front, and the downstream-side passage portion of the covering portion 117. One restriction piece 118 is formed at a portion covering 114 from the front. In addition, a total of five restricting pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed at portions of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that cover the bottom surface member 23. Note that the number of such restriction pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulating piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

  With the arrangement of the restricting pieces 118 as described above, referring to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 (and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 configured in the same manner) of the present embodiment tries to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P flows down so as to meander on the flow path F. When the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning port 24 (or the second start winning port 14). Without passing, the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) is basically passed. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P is guided to the flow path forming base 112. It is possible to fall into the flow path portion 115 and flow down the guide flow path portion 115 to win a special winning opening 24 (or the second start winning opening 14).

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 5 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Further, detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. An input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31 and controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on and generation of a big hit gaming state Information such as jackpot information indicating Information output circuit that outputs a force signal to an external device such as a hall computer (not shown) is also mounted on the main substrate 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, a payout control means (consisting of a payout control microcomputer (not shown)) mounted on the payout control board 37 is used for payout control commands (for example, from the game control microcomputer 560). , A prize ball number designation command for designating the number of prize balls) is received, and the ball dispensing device 97 is driven to perform a prize ball payout control. The payout control board 37 is connected with, for example, a full tank switch 48 for detecting that the surplus ball receiving tray (lower pan) 4 is in a full tank state. When the detection signal is input, a payout control command (full tank detection designation command) indicating that the surplus ball tray (lower pan) 4 is full is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control is performed on the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that variably display the decorative symbols, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbols, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 204b. The effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204a.

  The effect control CPU 201 outputs a drive signal to the movable member motor 78a via the input / output port 204c to operate the movable member 78. The effect control CPU 201 inputs a detection signal from the origin position sensor 78b via the input / output port 204c.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, a special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 in two-way communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs and background designs). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 209 that controls display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 200, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  In this embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second circuit on which other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with this production control board. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but other boards (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 and the like. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9 as it is or, for example, changed to a simplified command. May be. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is the interrupt address. Is the mode shown.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and in accordance with the contents, the control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80. Control is performed such that a recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery is transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, special symbol buffer, total prize ball number storage buffer, special symbol process flag, award ball flag, out of ball flag, payout stop flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag for this.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination is one round (a random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. Then, the state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs display control processing for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b, the first special symbol hold memory display device 18a, and the second special symbol hold memory display device 18b. Execute (Step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Determines the type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability jackpot, or 16R probability jackpot (for jackpot type determination)
(3) Random 5: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7: Determine initial value of random 1 (for determining random 1 initial value)
(6) Random 8: Determine initial value of random 6 (for determining random 6 initial value)

  In step S23 of the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (4) a normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) are also used. In this embodiment, a common random number (random 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of jackpot and a random number for determining the type of jackpot. However, different random numbers are provided. May be.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 56 performs a second special symbol process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Perform the appropriate processing. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol process processing (step S26C). In the normal symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a hold storage process (step S27). In the pending storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process for calculating and managing the total number (total pending memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. The payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 provides the output port with contents relating to solenoid on / off in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. In addition, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data A control process is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. Execute.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an error notification process for performing control related to the error notification (step S34). In step S 34, for example, when the CPU 56 receives a full tank detection designation command from the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 37, the full display error notification is displayed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to transmit a full error notification designation command to the control microcomputer 200. In addition, when the full tank detection designation command is not received from the payout control means after the full tank error notification display is started (when the full tank state of the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 is canceled) The CPU 56 performs control to transmit a full error cancel designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the CPU 56 Control is performed so that a big hit does not occur simultaneously in the two displays.

  FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a non-probability change-time jackpot determination table used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability). Probability / second KT state)) is used in the probability change jackpot determination table. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the non-probable change big hit determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the probability change big hit determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 10A is a jackpot determination value.

  FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value described in FIG. 10B is set in the small hit determination table. Moreover, the numerical value described in FIG. 10B is a small hit determination value.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S162B) may be performed only when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and there may be a small hit, and the KT state In this case, since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit gaming state is higher than the big hit gaming state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number for random determination (random 1). If it matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is decided to win a bonus for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10B, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 10A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIG. 10B indicates the probability (ratio) of being a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the probability (ratio) of small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be about 1/4. Yes. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. In addition, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but whether to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 8b to be a small hit symbol? It also means deciding whether or not.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, all are unconditionally set off. In addition, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined to be a small hit by probability (however, as will be described later, it may be out of force).

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b determine that the jackpot type is “2R normal jackpot” based on a random number for determining the jackpot type (random 2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. "2R-probable big hit", "6R normal big hit", "6R-probable big hit A", "6R-probable big hit B", "6R-probable big hit C", "9R-probable big hit A", "9R-probable big hit B", "9R-probable big hit B" This table is referred to in order to determine either “big hit C” or “16R probability variable big hit”.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 9%, and “ 6R probability variation big hit A ", 19% probability" 6R probability variation big hit B ", 18% probability" 6R probability variation big hit C ", 35% probability" 6R normal big hit " It is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 10%, and a probability of 17% “9R probability variation big hit A” is determined with a probability of 17%, “9R probability variation big hit B” is determined with a probability of 16%, and “9R probability variation big hit C” is determined with a probability of 16%. ”And“ 2R normal jackpot ”with a probability of 35%.

  The “16R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 16-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, “9R probability variation big hit A” to “9R probability variation big hit C” are big hits that are controlled to the nine round big hit gaming state and shift to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, “6R probability variation big hit A” to “6R probability variation big hit C” are big hits that are controlled to a six-round big hit gaming state and shift to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The “2R probability variation big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends.

  The “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The “2R normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and is controlled to a low probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished.

  In this embodiment, when “16R accuracy variation big hit”, “9R accuracy variation big hit A” to “9R accuracy variation big hit C”, “6R accuracy variation big hit A” to “6R probability variation big hit C”, and “6R normal big hit C”. In each round of the big hit game, the big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins. You can win up to 10 winning prizes per round. On the other hand, in the case of “2R probable big hit” and “2R normal big hit”, the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winning prizes that can be won every round is about 2 to 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the big hit game is ended, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. How to change the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 33).

  Hereinafter, “9R probability variation big hit A”, “9R probability variation big hit B” and “9R probability variation big hit C” are also simply referred to as “9R probability variation big hit”. In the following, “6R probability variation big hit A”, “6R probability variation big hit B” and “6R probability variation big hit C” are also simply referred to as “6R probability variation big hit”.

  FIGS. 12-14 is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol used in this embodiment, and a decoration symbol. EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is second byte data of an effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 32 types of # 01 to # 32 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 32) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

  When the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

  When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of place, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

  In this embodiment, even when in the non-KT state, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, there is a situation where a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls in the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the variation display execution frequency is lowered. By doing so, the occurrence frequency of the small hit is reduced, and the situation where the winning of the winning ball by the small hit is aimed at despite the non-KT state is prevented. In this embodiment, the “occurrence frequency per unit time” is, for example, the generation rate per unit time (for example, 1 minute). The occurrence rate of is higher than the normal state.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent an act of unjustly aiming for a winning ball in the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of small hit, so it is configured to have a shorter variation time than the case of big hit. Yes.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13D, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 13D, when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state is out of place, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of a shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined. The Further, when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Variation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the special winning prize is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 although the frequency of small hits is increased. The special prize opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls have accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately If the device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 before the transition to the first KT state. By allowing the special variable winning ball device 22 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all of the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, This prevents a situation in which more than expected prize balls can be obtained in the first KT state. In addition, when the big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 06 is determined, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

  In addition, if the change display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the second to 49th variation shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13E, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 49th change in the low probability / first KT state, one of the second change patterns # 07 to # 13 To be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 13E, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state is out of place, the second variation pattern # 07 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or In some cases, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 08 of a shortened variation that is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state is a deviation, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 09 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortening fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the fluctuation time is further shorter to 1 second. There are cases where the second variation pattern # 11 of the shortening variation is determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored. The second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 include one or more second reserved memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate. In addition, when the big hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

  In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 50th change (that is, the low change / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 13F is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13F, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Is done.

  In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the effect display device 9 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 13F, when it is determined that the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state is a loss or a small hit, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as “End of Chance Time!”. The second variation pattern # 14 and the second variation pattern # 15 with the end display are determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 13F, when it is determined that the big hit is the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the character display such as “End of Chance Time!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9. After the display, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined restoration display is determined.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first special symbol variation display becomes a big hit during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case in which a big hit immediately occurs in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly disengaged, the forcible disengagement frequently occurs in spite of being in the second KT state, and the player hits the small hit You will not receive any profits. For this reason, in this embodiment, the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol is set to a short variation time so as to shift to the big hit gaming state based on the variation of the first special symbol before the forced disengagement frequently occurs. It is configured.

  Unlike the present embodiment, even when the second special symbol starts to change during the big hit change of the first special symbol, the configuration of the second special symbol is not forced to deviate (for example, the first special symbol If the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped when the second special symbol is changing, the gaming time of the first special symbol jackpot change time in the KT state is a gaming machine with a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed. May be a long variation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit immediately occurs in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. If the big hit fluctuation time is set to the same short fluctuation time as the deviation, the player You can no longer receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time at which small hits can occur at least several times. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit or the 9R probability variable big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the change display of the first change is executed, the second special symbol change pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first change shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Is done.

  Similarly to the first change in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14G, even when the first change in the high probability / first KT state is determined to be out of place, the change time is 5 seconds. The second variation pattern # 17 having a short shortening variation may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a deviation, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 18 with reach. Also, even when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing the second start winning opening may be determined (second variation pattern # 19). On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14G, when the big hit is determined as the first change in the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  In addition, in the case of executing the change display after the second change after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit or the 9R probability change big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability to be shown / first KT and the second and subsequent variations is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28 is performed. It is determined.

  Similarly to the 2nd to 49th variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when it is determined that the second probability after the second variation in the high probability / first KT state is a deviation, the variation time May be determined as the second variation pattern # 22 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds, or the second variation pattern # 23 with a shortened variation as short as one second. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation from the second change of the high probability / first KT state, it may be determined to be the second change pattern # 24 with reach. In addition, when a small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 25 having a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and a short fluctuation time of 1 second are further shortened. There are cases where the second variation pattern # 26 of variation is determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the change may be determined to the second change pattern # 27 with reach. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored. The second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 include one or more second reserved memories stored. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate. Further, when the big hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. Variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 32.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined that there is a high probability / displacement in the second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 25 having a short variation of 1.5 seconds. There is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 30 with reach. Further, when the small probability is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 31 having a short variation of 1.5 seconds. Further, in the case of determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 with reach.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the case of a low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the case of a high probability state.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Among these, FIG. 15 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable ball device 15 in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus 22 is shown.

  First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Is determined, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second startup winning port opening processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning port 14 when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15A, the open time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short. Opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is finished, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened for the next normal symbol variation time. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is a total of 0.2 seconds, a symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and a second start winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened.

  In the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. The game ball is gated after 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the symbol variation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening release pretreatment time 0.1 seconds. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is approximately 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state in which the normal symbol is not changed to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually normal. Since the time until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the state where the symbol is not changed is shorter, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. When controlled, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Therefore, in the first KT state, a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state in which the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when a game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol is displayed. Is determined, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 second. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning port opening processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. Then, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning port 14 when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as extremely short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + design fixed time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process is secured. Accordingly, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), since the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball apparatus 15 is short and the interval period (closed period) is long, the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 of this type, and it is easy to win a game ball to the special winning opening 24.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning port opening pre-treatment time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is gated. The time required to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 15 after passing through 32 is approximately 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually normal. Since it is longer than the time from the game ball passing through the gate 32 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 before being played. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state in which the normal symbol is not changed is difficult to win the variable winning ball device 15.

  In this embodiment, normal symbol process processing is executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) to execute the normal symbol variation display or to control the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to be opened. This is performed by executing (see step S26C). The game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit the normal figure in the normal symbol process of step S26C, depending on whether it is the KT state or the normal state. It is determined whether or not to hit the normal map according to different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). The same probability regardless of whether the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or a jackpot gaming state (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to reach the ordinary map.

  In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same in 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening releasing process is The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is made different by shortening to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. I can't. For example, you may comprise so that the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may differ by varying the variation time and the symbol determination time in the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods). In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the methods described above, it is possible to suppress winning in the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

  In this embodiment, as described later, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating the high base state. The opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be short as shown in FIG. .

  For example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. The ball device 15 is controlled with a first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, a second opening pattern (for opening the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) for a short time ( You may comprise so that it may control by short open. In other words, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be controlled not to be set in other states including the big hit gaming state.

  Even in the first KT state, when the last change display in the low probability / first KT state is executed, the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop in the 50th special symbol shortened fluctuation period in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, when a left-handed notification is made after the low probability / first KT state ends, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 15, a flag for shortening variation of the special symbol variation display is further used. The special symbol variation display may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

  Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 15 is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible to prevent winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the normal symbol variation time is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the ordinary symbol is not retained. This is because the device 15 is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the timing of the second special symbol variation stop timing (when the small symbol hits, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 Until the game ball that has passed through reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, the variable winning ball device 15 is not released, and the special winning opening 24 can be won). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is released before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 by shortening the normal symbol variation time. Since it is set so as to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 16, commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H), 8011 (H) to 8030 (H) correspond to the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H), the first variable display section 9a or the second variable display section 9b. Control to start the variable display of the decorative pattern at.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation big hit A designation command)) which designates that the display result of variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit A. It is. Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (9R probability variation big hit B designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit B. It is. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (9R probability variation big hit C designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit C. It is. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (6R probability variation big hit A designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit A. It is. Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (6R probability variation big hit B designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit B. It is. Command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (6R probability variation big hit C designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit C. It is. Command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 900A (H) is an effect control command (display result 10 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. . Command 900B (H) is an effect control command (display result 11 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . Command 900C (H) is an effect control command (display result 12 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 12 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation specified by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first variation pattern command is performed. Since the command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second decorative symbol, Although the display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit a display result designation command, but each of 15R probability variation big hit / 9R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R normal big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / displacement The variation pattern command may be determined in correspondence with the above, and the production control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing stop of variable display of the first symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing to stop the variable display of the second symbol.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  Command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. In this embodiment, a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning specified command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

  Command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that the first customer is waiting (the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that the second customer is waiting (the second special symbol is not changed and the second reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / second KT state.

  Command EE00 (H) is an effect control command (full tank error notification designation command) for designating display of a full tank error notification. The command EE01 (H) is an effect control command (full tank error release designation command) for designating cancellation of the full tank error notification display.

  The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b and the display state of the background symbol display portion 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. The sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed presentation control command related to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the presentation control board 80.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is executed.

  When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process, the first start port switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 13 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 has occurred (step S311), a first start opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S300 to S308 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

  The processes in steps S300 to S308 are as follows.

  First special symbol normal process (step S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  First special symbol changing process (step S303): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the production control microcomputer 200 Control is performed to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  First special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  First gate passage waiting process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S306.

  First big winning opening opening pre-process (step S306): This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example). The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round. However, when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game.

  First big winning opening opening process (step S307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 23a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is satisfied and there are still rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). To do. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308.

  First big hit end process (step S308): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed to cause the production control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a high base flag, or a KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not is 4) (step S212). If the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). . In the process of step S215, the big hit determination random number (random 1), the big hit type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5), which are software random numbers, are extracted and stored in the storage area. . Note that the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 5) in a first variation pattern setting process described later. May be.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, a big hit determination random number (random 1), a big hit type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5) are stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Is done. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Further, control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state in which the first special symbol display unit 8a does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) is not in progress.

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (step S51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

  If the first reserved memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S52A).

  If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55 Are stored in the first random number buffer area (step S53A), the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are: The order of extraction is also stored in an identifiable manner.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S55A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non-KT state is present, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability / first KT state is determined and the low probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variation flag is ON and the high base flag is ON, the high probability / first KT state is determined. If the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the probability is high / second KT state and the high probability / second KT background designation command is Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big special symbol variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S56A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big special hit of the second special symbol is being changed. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S66A without performing the processes after step S57A. Thereby, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is being performed in step S56A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) as a big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S58A. Regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forced to be off.

  In addition to the big hit determination, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit, if the second special symbol big hit variation is in step S56A, steps S57A to S62A. The random number value (fixed value) is set as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or may be a completely different random number) By performing the small hit determination, the big hit determination random number (random 1) may be forcibly disregarded at the time of starting winning.

  If it is not during the big hit variation of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S57A) and executes the big hit determination module (step S57A). S58A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S59A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step S60A). . Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit A to 6R probability variable big hit C, or 6R normal big hit (step S61A), and the big hit type is stored (step S62A). The process proceeds to step S66A. If it is not a big hit in step S59A (that is, if it is a loss), the process proceeds to step S66A.

  In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, the case where it is unconditionally determined to be all off is shown. I can't. For example, even when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to be determined to be a big hit with a low probability.

  In step S66A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S66A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S66A.

  In step S58A, the game state is taken into consideration and it is determined whether or not a big hit is made using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first checks whether or not the KT flag indicating the KT state is set (step S1700). If the KT flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the non-KT time shown in FIG. 12A as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table is selected (step S1701). If the KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first KT time shown in FIG. 12B as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. One special symbol variation pattern table is selected (step S1702).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps S1701 and S1702, and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is to be used (step S1703). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1704).

  In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1703, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and changes the variation time. Is started (step S1705), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1706). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1707).

  In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), based on the determination result of whether or not to win, and the determination result of the jackpot type, Any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 6 designation command to display result 9 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed in the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the specified command is performed (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

  When the first variation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

  In this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol by executing the processing of steps S1125A to S1125A, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. Is forcibly stopped to prevent a situation where a big hit occurs simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the side of the production control microcomputer 200, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly disengaged, the first variable display portion 9a in the first variable display section 9a receives the symbol confirmation designation command. In addition to stopping the stop display of one decorative symbol, control is performed to forcibly stop and display the symbol as a variation display result of the first decorative symbol based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S302.

  In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process shown in FIG. 29, the first start port switch passing process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed, so that even when the first special symbol or the second special symbol jackpot symbol is being displayed, a new start prize is generated. It is configured to store new pending storage.

  If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (step S2010). The process proceeds to step S2016. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step S2011) to become “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S2012). When the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step S2016. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the CPU 56 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step S2013). Further, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is set (step S2014). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S2016. If the certain change state is not set, the CPU 56 resets the KT flag indicating the KT state (step S2015).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed at a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High probability at the end of big hit games based on 9R probability variation big hits A to C and 6R probability variation big hits A to C when 50 times of fluctuation display is executed under control of high base state (low probability / 1st KT state) In some cases, the display is changed 30 times, 50 times, or 70 times under the control of the high base state (high probability / first KT state). In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th fluctuation display is finished, it is determined as Y in step S2012, and the high base flag is reset in step S2013. In step S2014, it is determined as N. In step S2015, the KT flag is also reset, and the state shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). Further, in the case of the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), when the 30th, 50th or 70th fluctuation display is finished, it is determined as Y in step S2012, and the high base is determined in step S2013. Only by resetting the flag, it is determined as Y in step S2014, the KT flag is not reset, and the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

  In step S2016, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S2016). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S2017). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation storage flag indicating that the probability variation state has been controlled before the big hit (step S2018). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step S2019). If the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 sets a high base storage flag indicating that the high base state was controlled before starting the big hit (step S2020). Then, if set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the KT flag high base number counter (step S2021).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a pre-winner opening timer (step S2022), sets the round 1 release pattern data corresponding to the big hit type (step S2023), and sets “1” in the round number counter indicating the big win round number. Is set (step S2024), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2025).

  When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step S2016), the CPU 56 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S2026).

  Although details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a right-handed notification for urging the player to launch a game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. . Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operation gate 17 can be executed.

  Conversely, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 or the operation gate 17 in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), a mode with a low degree of recognition (for example, a low volume sound output or a small sound output). It is also possible to make a left-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball to the left of the game area 7 by screen display). On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), a mode with a high recognition degree (for example, a loud sound) You may comprise so that left-handed notification may be performed by an output or a large screen display. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who has accidentally fired a game ball to the right of the game area 7, a light left-hand notification is given in a mode of low recognition to the surroundings of the gaming machine. Thus, a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation may be configured to perform a left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. If comprised in that way, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged to return to the left-handed operation from the store clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second start winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is made. Also good. In addition, the gate 32 and the operation gate 17 perform left-handed notification when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and the second start winning port 14 or the special winning port. In 24, when a certain number (for example, 1) or more of game balls less than a predetermined number is detected, a left-handed notification may be performed.

  In addition, for example, when a game ball is detected at the gate 32 or the operation gate 17, no external signal is output, whereas when a game ball is detected at the second start winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24, an external signal is output. It may be configured to do.

  In this embodiment, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning award 14 or When a winning of a game ball in the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and a left-handed notification may be performed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is not input, the process is terminated as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits a first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing. A corresponding value is set (step S2503).

  In this embodiment, when the first gate passage waiting process is executed, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the first special symbol variation display result, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the operating gate 17 The game ball is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the first big prize opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big prize opening pre-timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of Round 1, the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening set in Step S2022 of the first special symbol stop process is measured by executing the process of Step S1401. The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of round 1 is measured. Also, if it is round 1 or later, the value of the pre-winner opening timer set in the big open-mouth opening process is measured by executing the process of step S1401, and after each round ( The interval period (except after the last round) will be measured.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer. However, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separately set. You may comprise so that time may be measured using this timer.

  Next, when the timer before opening the big prize opening times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411), the CPU 56 sets the current round number in the EXT data of the designation command during opening of the big prize opening. Then, control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed (step S1412).

  Next, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening to be in an open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round to the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step S1415).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S307) (step S1416).

  FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 are flowcharts showing the first big hit end process (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A). If the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S2201A), and the first big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the processing is ended.

  In step S2204A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is 16R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and sets the KT flag indicating the KT state. Then, the state shifts to the KT state (step S2208A). Then, control goes to a step S2222A. In the case of 16R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If it is not the 16R probability variable big hit, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been completed this time is the 6R probability variable big hit AC (step S2209A). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit A to C can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is 6R probability variation big hit AC, CPU56 will confirm whether the probability variation storage flag is set (step S2210A). If the probability variation storage flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step S2211A). If the high base storage flag is set (that is, if there is a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) before the big hit starts), the flow proceeds to step S2212A. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if there is a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) before the big hit starts), the flow shifts to step S2217A. If the probability variation flag is not set (N in Step S2210A), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base storage flag is set (Step S2216A). If the high base storage flag is set (that is, if the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) before starting the big hit), the flow shifts to step S2217A. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) before starting the big hit), the process proceeds to step S2212A. Therefore, in this case, control is performed to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  When it is a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2211A), or when it is a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (N in step S2216A) ), The CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212A), sets the high base flag to transition to the high base state (step S2213A), and further sets the KT flag. Is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “30”, “50”, or “70” in the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state, depending on which of the 6R probability variation big hits AC is completed. Is set (step S2215A). In this case, if it is 6R probability variation big hit A, set "30" to the high base number counter, and if it is 6R probability variation big hit B, set "50" to the high base number counter. If it is C, “70” is set in the high base number counter. Note that it is possible to determine which of 6R probability variation big hits A to C is, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal process. Then, control goes to a step S2222A.

  When it is a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (N in step S2211A), or when it is a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2216A) The CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2217A), and sets the KT flag and transitions to the KT state (step S2218A). Therefore, in this case, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled. Then, control goes to a step S2222A.

  If it is not 6R probability big hit A to C (that is, if it is 6R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219A), and sets the KT flag and sets the KT state. (Step S2220A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step S2221A). Then, control goes to a step S2222A. Therefore, in the case of 6R normal big hit, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  Next, if it is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag (step S2222A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2223A).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

  When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process, the second start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S321), a second start opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). It should be noted that if “first” in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as “second”, the second start port switch passing process will be explained. Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S350 to S361 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

  The processes in steps S350 to S361 are as follows.

  Second special symbol normal process (step S350): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. In addition, when the big hit is not made, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is made the small hit. If it is a small hit, the small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S351. Note that the second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

  Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S352.

  Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S353.

  Second special symbol changing process (step S353): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the production control microcomputer 200 Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Second special symbol stop process (step S354): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S355. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is out of place (including cases where it is out of force), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Second gate passage waiting process (step S355): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example).

  Pre-opening process for second big prize opening (step S356): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. In the second big prize opening opening pre-process, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the second big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Second big prize opening opening process (step S357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 23a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). To do. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example).

  Second big hit end process (step S358): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed to cause the production control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a high base flag, or a KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Pre-opening process for second small hit (step S359): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. In the second small hit pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. Also, the execution time of the second small hit release processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)). The pre-opening process for the second small hit is also a process for starting the small hit game.

  Second small hit opening process (step S360): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. A process for confirming that the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is satisfied is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 of 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15) elapses. In addition, when a game ball is won at the special winning opening and the second counting switch 25a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S361 (in this example, 11 (decimal number)).

  Second small hit end processing (step S361): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350 is a state in which the second special symbol indicator 8b does not display the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved memory number (step S51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

  If the second reserved memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S52B).

  If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55 Is stored in the second random number buffer area (step S53B), the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the second reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S55B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S55A of the first special symbol normal process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step S56B). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S66B without performing the processes after step S57B. Thereby, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S56B, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) that is out of place as the big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S58B. Regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of starting winning a prize, it may be forcibly removed.

  In addition, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S56B, the small hit determination random number (a random number common to the big hit determination random number may be used without performing the processing of steps S57B to S62B. (It may be a completely different random number) By setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place and performing a small hit determination, which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning a prize Regardless, it may be forcibly removed.

  If the first special symbol jackpot change is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S57B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S57B). S58B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S59B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step S60B). . Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variation big hit, 9R probability variation big hit A to 9R probability variation big hit C, 2R probability variation big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step S61B), and the big hit type is stored. (Step S62B), the process proceeds to Step S66B.

  If the big hit is not made in step S59B, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the small hit determination module (step S63B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a big hit is determined when a big hit determination random number (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step S64B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step S65B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S66B.

  In step S66B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S66B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S66B.

  In step S58B, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if “first” is read as “second”, the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first performs a process similar to that in step S1700 to check whether the KT flag is set. If the KT flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the non-KT time shown in FIG. 13C as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The second special symbol variation pattern table is selected. If the KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the variation pattern depending on whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determination, one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 13D to 14I is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13D is selected. If the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13E is selected. If the 50th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13F is selected. Select. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. If it is the second and subsequent changes, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (H) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14I is selected.

  In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit and to determine the big hit type decision result. Based on this, control is performed to transmit any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command, display result 10 designation command to display result 12 designation command) to the production control microcomputer 200. .

  The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. That is, in the first special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 23, if “first” is read as “second”, the second special symbol variation processing is explained.

  The second gate passage waiting process (step S355) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S305) shown in FIG. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if “first” is read as “second”, the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

  The second big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S356) is the same as the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) shown in FIG. That is, in the pre-opening process for the first big winning opening shown in FIG. 26, if the “first” is read as “second”, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is explained.

  FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 are flowcharts showing the second big hit end process (step S358) in the special symbol process. In the second jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S2200B). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S2201B), and the second big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the processing is ended.

  In step S2204B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 checks whether the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R-probable big hit or a 2R-probable big hit (step S2206B). Whether 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B), and sets the KT flag and transitions to the KT state (step S2208B). ). Then, control goes to a step S2222B. In the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If neither the 16R-probable big hit or the 2R-probable big hit is found, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been completed this time is a 9R-probable big hit AC (step S2209B). Whether or not it is 9R probability variation big hit A to C can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the 9R probability variation big hit A to C, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step S2210B). If the probability variation storage flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step S2211B). If the high base storage flag is set (that is, if there is a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) before the big hit starts), the process proceeds to step S2212B. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if there is a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) before the big hit starts), the flow shifts to step S2217B. If the probability change flag is not set (N in step S2210B), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step S2216B). If the high base storage flag is set (that is, if the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) before the start of the big hit), the flow proceeds to step S2217B. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if there is a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) before the big hit starts, the process proceeds to step S2212B. Therefore, in this case, control is performed to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  When it is a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2211B), or when it is a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (N in step S2216B) ), The CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), sets the high base flag to transition to the high base state (step S2213B), and further sets the KT flag. Is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “30”, “50”, or “70” to the high base number counter according to which of the 9R probability variation big hits A to C is the type of big hit that has been completed this time (step S2215B). In this case, if it is 9R probability variation big hit A, “30” is set to the high base number counter, and if it is 9R probability variation big hit B, “50” is set to the high base number counter. If it is C, “70” is set in the high base number counter. Note that it is possible to determine which of 9R probability variation big hits A to C is, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal process. Then, control goes to a step S2222B.

  When it is a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (N in step S2211B), or when it is a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2216B) The CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2217B), and sets the KT flag and transitions to the KT state (step S2218B). Therefore, in this case, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled. Then, control goes to a step S2222B.

  If it is not 9R probability variable big hit A to C (that is, 2R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219A), and sets the KT flag and sets the KT state. (Step S2220B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step S2221B). Then, control goes to a step S2222B. Therefore, in the case of 2R normal big hit, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  Next, if it is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag (step S2222B). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2223B).

  Here, the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state transitions in this embodiment. First, in this embodiment, in a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning is mainly generated at the first start winning opening 13, and a variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 16R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit A to C, or a 6R normal big hit occurs. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when a 16R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game is finished, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) The high probability / low base state is maintained until a big hit occurs (see steps S2206A to S2208A). In addition, when 6R probability variation big hits AC are generated in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game is finished, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit is The high probability / high base state is maintained until the change display of the number of occurrences or according to the jackpot type is ended (see steps S2209A, N in S2210A, N in S2216A, S2212A to S2215A). In this case, if 6R probability variation big hit A, the high probability / high base state is maintained until 30 fluctuation displays are completed, and if 6R probability variation big hit B, high probability / high base is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed. The state is maintained, and if it is 6R probability variation big hit C, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the display of 70 fluctuations is completed. Also, if 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game is finished, shift to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and whether the next big hit will occur The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps S2219A to S2221A).

  In this embodiment, when the player has moved to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated at the second start winning port 14, and a variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 16R positive variation big hit, a 9R positive variable big hit A to C, a 2R positive variable big hit, or a 2R normal big hit is generated. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when a 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state (high (Probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). Further, when 9R probability variation big hit AC is generated in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot is generated or the display of the number of changes corresponding to the jackpot type is terminated (see steps S2209B, N in S2210B, N in S2216B, S2212B to S2215B). ). In this case, the high probability / high base state is maintained until 30 fluctuation displays are completed for 9R probability variation big hit A, and the high probability / high base until 50 fluctuation displays are terminated for 9R probability variation big hit B. If the state is maintained, and if the 9R probability variation big hit C, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the display of 70 fluctuations is completed. In this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of 9R probability variation hits AC is 50% (see FIG. 11). When the high base state is reached, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, after 6R probability variation big hits A to C and 9R probability variation big hits A to C occur and become a high probability / high base state, the next big hit does not occur and the fluctuation display is 30 times, 50 times or 70 times. When the process ends, as shown in FIG. 33, the process proceeds to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (see Y in steps S2010 to S2013 and S2014). In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), after the big hit game is over, a transition is made to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is finished (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), any probability variation big hits such as 16R probability variation big hits, 9R probability variation big hits A to C, and 2R probability variable big hits occur. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps S2206B to S2208B, step S2209B). , S2210B N, S2216B Y, S2217B-S2218B). In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the transition to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) occurs after the big hit game ends. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is finished (see steps S2219B to S2221B). In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 2R normal big hit is 35% (see FIG. 11), so once the low probability / high base state is reached. A low probability / high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is reached, when the next big hit does not occur and the 50-time variation display ends, as shown in FIG. Then, transition to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps S2010 to S2013, N in S2014, S2015).

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), any of the probability variation big hits such as 16R probability variation big hit, 9R probability variation big hit A to C, and 2R probability variable big hit occurs. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps S2206B to S2208B, step S2209B). , S2210B Y, S2211B N, S2217B to S2218B). In this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the 16R probability variation big hit, the 9R probability variation big hit A to C, and Since the total probability of 2R probability variation is 65% (see FIG. 11), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 65%. In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

  In addition, in FIG. 33, although the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed at a low rate. There is also the possibility of being executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). When 9R probability variable big hits A to C occur, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs or 30 times or 50 times depending on the type of big hit. Or, the high probability / high base state is maintained until 70 fluctuation displays are completed. Also, when 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Moreover, in FIG. 33, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is explained, but the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that In this case, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when 6R probability variation big hits A to C occur, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs or 30 times or 50 times depending on the big hit type. Or, the high probability / high base state will be maintained until the display of 70 fluctuations is completed. In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 33, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that In this case, when any of the 16R probability variation big hits and the 6R probability variation big hits A to C has occurred, the transition is made to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 33, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that In this case, when any of the 16R probability variation big hits and the 6R probability variation big hits A to C has occurred, the transition is made to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol changing process is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable symbol special display. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the display result designation command transmission processing also varies. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111). A switch passage process (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (step S5112): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs processing for extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): The CPU 56 can start the normal symbol variation (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol is processed). When the display 10 does not display the change of the normal symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the open / close operation based on the normal symbol display 10 being hit and displayed, the gate pass memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102).

  Normal symbol stop process (step S5102): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, it checks whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the time before the normal electric accessory is released is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5103).

  Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5103): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start opening the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S5104).

  Normal electric accessory operation processing (step S5104): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S5121). If the number of stored gate passes is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the KT flag is set (step S5124). If the KT flag is set (that is, the KT state (the first KT state, the second KT state)), the normal symbol for KT is used as a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not the normal symbol is used. A determination table is selected (step S5125). If the KT flag is not set (ie, the normal state (non-KT state)), the normal normal symbol determination table is selected as the normal symbol determination table (step S5126).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the normal symbol determination table selected in steps S5125 and S5126, and determines whether or not to be per normal symbol (step S5127).

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a determination value per normal symbol to be compared with a random number for determination per normal symbol (random 4) is set. There are a normal normal symbol determination table used in KT and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, it is determined to win with a probability of 1/10 in the normal state and with a probability of 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is different between the normal state and the KT state, so that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is more likely to occur in the KT state than in the normal state. Although it is configured so that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal state and the KT state may be the same.

  Specifically, in step S5127, if it is in the KT state, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table for KT, and the random number value for determination per normal symbol read in step S5122 is within the range of [3 to 12]. If it is in the normal state, it is determined using the normal normal symbol determination table whether or not the random number value for determination per normal symbol read in step S5122 is [3]. To do. In the case of winning, a winning symbol is set as a display result (step S5128), and the process proceeds to step S5130.

  In step S5127, if the read random number for normal symbol determination is not within the winning range, the CPU 56 sets a symbol as a display result (step S5129), and proceeds to step S5130.

  In step S5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step S5130, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol variation time (N in step S5130, S5132).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5133).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer. A value is set (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends.

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (in step S5127). (Step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step S5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

  When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a missing symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step S3708).

  In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3704). That is, if the state is the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step S3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory release (step S3705). .

  Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5103) (step S3707).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by −1 (step S3801). Then, CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory release has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S625). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S624).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing this, the first KT state is in a state where it is easier to start and win the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Accordingly, the first KT state is configured such that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

  Note that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second start winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is released more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). Control may be performed so that the number of times of opening 15 is set to 1 while the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is set to 2 in the first KT state. By doing so, in the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, it is possible to make it easier to start and win the second start winning opening 14.

  Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared to the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 described above, and the variable winning ball device 15 It may be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104) (step S3807).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory operating process (step S5104). In the normal electric actor operation process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the normal symbol process timer times out in step S3902 (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to be closed (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped and the variable winning ball device 15 is closed.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) (step S3912).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display portion 9a is executed. . Further, the second decorative symbol process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process, a process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. . Further, background symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a notice determination random number is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  44 to 47 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 12 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 executes a confirmation command reception process (step S621).

  If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S622), the effect control CPU 201 uses the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S623). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S623 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S624). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, and is a first instruction notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball substantially to the right side of the game area 7 and a second that prompts the game gate 17 to launch. Instruction notification is provided. As the first instruction notification, the first normal instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters “right-handed” on the entire surface of the effect display device 9 and “right-handed” on a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9. And a second reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters “”. As the second instruction notification, the second display notification displays an image including the characters “Aim for the gate” on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 A normal instruction notification and a first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters “Aim at the gate” on a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9 are provided.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected until 10 seconds after the first instruction notification is started. In such a case, the second instruction notification image is superimposed on the first instruction notification image.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 201 resets an instruction notification timer for measuring a period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S625).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to newly start a right-handed display (small) for prompting a right-handed operation on the effect display device 9 (step S626). In step S626, for example, a control for starting display of a small-size right-handed display at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S628). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S628 is also referred to as an ending flag.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start specifying command (step S629), the effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit start specifying command reception flag (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end specifying command (step S631), the effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit end specifying command reception flag (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is a low probability / non-KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, , A blue display color background screen) (step S634). Further, if the right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 9, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to delete the right-handed display (step S635). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step S636).

  If the received effect control command is the low probability / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as the background screen corresponding to the low probability / first KT state (for example, , A green display color background screen) (step S638). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying a right-handed display (small) for prompting a right-handed operation on the effect display device 9 (step S639). In step S639, for example, control for starting display of a small-size right-handed display at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S640). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state and the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is high-accuracy / first KT background designation (step S642), the effect control CPU 201 has a value of a variation counter for measuring the number of executions of variable display during the high probability / first KT state. It is confirmed whether or not is 51 or more (step S643). The variation counter is set according to the big hit type when the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit A to C or 9R probability variable big hit A to C is completed (see step S9012). If the value of the variation counter is 51 or more, the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image A (step S644). If the value of the variation counter is not 51 or more (if it is 50 or less), the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter is 31 or more (step S645). If the value of the variation counter is 31 or more, the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image B (step S646). If the value of the variation counter is not 31 or more (or 30 or less), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the variation counter is 11 or more (step S647). If the value of the variation counter is 11 or more, the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image C (step S648). If the value of the variation counter is not 11 or more (if 10 or less), the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image D (step S649).

  In this embodiment, when the process of steps S643 to S649 is executed, when the high probability / first KT state is controlled, the high probability / second KT state is set (if a big hit does not occur in the middle). The background image A is displayed if the remaining number of variable displays until the transition is 70 to 51 times, the background image B is displayed if it is 50 to 31 times, and the background image C is displayed if it is 30 to 11 times. If it is displayed 10 times or less, the background image D is displayed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying a right-handed display (small) for prompting a right-handed operation on the effect display device 9 (step S650). In step S650, for example, control for starting display of a small-size right-handed display at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag (step S651). In addition, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is high-accuracy / second KT background designation (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, , A red display color background screen) (step S654). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying a right-handed display (large) for prompting a right-handed operation on the effect display device 9 (step S655). In step S655, for example, a large-size right-handed display at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (a right-handed display of a size larger than the right-handed display displayed in the first KT state or during the big hit game) Control to start display. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the second KT state flag (step S656). In addition, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S657).

  If the received effect control command is a full error notification designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not a big hit game is currently being played (step S659). Whether or not the game is currently a big hit game is confirmed, for example, whether or not the value of the background symbol process flag, which will be described later, is a value of 4 to 7 indicating that it is a big hit display process to a big hit end effect process This can be determined. If a big hit game is currently being played, the CPU 201 for effect control performs control to start displaying a full tank error notification (large) on the effect display device 9 (step S660). In step S660, for example, a large-size character display such as “full error!” Is displayed on the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9. If the big hit game is not currently being played, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying a full tank error notification (small) on the effect display device 9 (step S661). In step S661, for example, a small size character display such as “full” is displayed on the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  If the received effect control command is a full tank error release designation command (step S662), if the full display error notification is displayed on the effect display device 9, the effect control CPU 201 deletes the full tank error notification display. Is performed (step S663).

  If the received effect control command is a grand prize opening prize designation command (step S664), the effect control CPU 201 sets 15 in each of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter (one prize to the big prize opening). (Corresponding to the number of winning prize balls) is added (step S665).

  The 1st prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the Renso, and it is a big winning prize in the jackpot game that triggered the launch of the Renso and all the jackpot games that occurred during the Renso. A prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the prize ball based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the probable change state, the first KT state and the second KT state in the recreational zone. It is added at any time. The second prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a big hit game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the big hit games that occurred during the second KT state. Thus, a winning ball based on the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening and a winning ball based on the winning of the gaming ball in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the second KT state are added as needed.

  Further, if the CPU 201 for effect control is displaying a display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive game showing the number of prize balls during the game in the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition. If the display of the prize ball number during the Renso is updated and the special rush medium prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the second prize ball counter after addition is displayed. Based on the value of the special rush, the display of the number of prize balls during special rush is updated (step S666).

  If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S667), the effect control CPU 201 sets 10 (1 to the special prize opening 24) to each of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter. (Corresponding to the number of winning balls per winning) is added (step S668). Also, if the CPU 201 for effect control is displaying the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive games, it updates the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive games based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition and the special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the added second prize ball number counter (step S669).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S670). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display a prize ball addition display (for example, a character display such as “+10”). (Step S671). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S672) and lights the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S673).

  On the other hand, if the 2nd KT state flag is not set (it is not the 2nd KT state), it will return to Step S611, without performing processing of Steps S671-S673.

  By executing the processing of steps S670 to S673, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the display of the winning ball addition display and the output of the winning sound are performed. When the special winning opening lamp 24a is turned on and the game ball is won in the special winning opening 24, if it is not in the second KT state, the display of the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the special winning prize are displayed. The lighting of the mouth lamp 24a is not performed.

  Note that it is not always necessary to perform all of the display of the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a, and only one or two of these are executed. May be.

  If the received production control command is the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S674), the production control CPU 201 sets a first demonstration command reception flag indicating that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received. (Step S675). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S676). If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the KT state), the process returns to step S611. If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 performs a movable member initial operation process for performing an initial operation of the movable member 78. It executes (step S677).

  If the received production control command is the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 201 sets a second demonstration command reception flag indicating that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received. (Step S679). Further, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S680). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process returns to step S611. If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the KT state), the effect control CPU 201 executes the movable member initial operation process (step S681).

  In this embodiment, when the process of steps S674 to S681 is executed, the movable member initial operation process is executed when the customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received. When the display designation command is received, the movable member initial operation process is executed on the condition that it is in the non-KT state, and on the condition that it is in the KT state when the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received. The member initial operation process is executed.

  In the movable member initial operation processing in steps S677 and S681, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the origin position sensor 78b is input, thereby determining whether or not the movable member 78 is at the origin position. Determine. If the movable member 78 is not at the origin position, the effect control CPU 201 drives the movable member motor 78a to control the movable member 78 to the origin position (initial operation).

  Even when the movable member 78 is at the origin position, the movable member 78 may be operated to return to the origin position again.

  Further, when the initial operation for moving the movable member 78 to the origin position fails, execution of the effect using the movable member 78 is restricted (for example, the movable member 78 is used until the next power-on is performed). You may comprise so that a production may not be performed.

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S682). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing processing upon receipt of a confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 11 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the symbol that has been stopped is a jackpot symbol. It is determined whether or not (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 11 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command. It is determined whether or not the command is a command (step S4401A).

  If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags are set), the process moves to step S4404.

  If it is in the normal state, the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether or not a ready-to-be-displayed flag indicating that the big hit preparation display indicating that the big hit is being changed has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the ready-in-display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

  In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

  In step S4402, if the ready display flag indicating that the ready display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. To do. The display during preparation is an effect that is executed when the change of the first special symbol is started during the big hit change of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the character “preparing for big hit” is displayed. The included image is an effect displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a still image including the characters “in preparation for jackpot” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a jackpot game is started as a display in preparation. You may comprise so that the display corresponding to the period until (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol) may be performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Also, when the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, if it is in the KT state, the first normal instruction notification is performed. When the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction is notified only when the preparation display is executed in the normal state, and the preparation display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process (step S706) shown in FIG.
First, the effect control CPU 201 performs instruction notification control processing for performing control regarding instruction notification (step S4501), and performs demonstration display control processing (step S4502) for performing control regarding demonstration display.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 performs one of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied. If the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the variation. To control. The background symbol variation start condition is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any variation pattern command is received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S901).

  Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the variation of the left middle right background symbol is started. Further, a background symbol stop symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the background symbol variation time is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

  Background symbol changing process (step S902): The end of the background symbol changing time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S903).

  Background symbol stop process (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the change of the background symbol and display the stop symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit middle process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on the condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to a value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hitting process (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hitting display process (step S908) is set on condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

  Big hit display processing (step S904): Control of big hit display is performed. Then, when receiving a winning prize opening opening display command (a winning prize opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to a value corresponding to step S905).

  In-round processing (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

  Small hit processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. When the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is being performed (step S4601). If the first instruction notification is being performed, the instruction notification timer value is subtracted by one (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If time-out has occurred (when 10 seconds have elapsed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started (Y in step S3503, S4605) if the first normal instruction notification is being executed. If the 1 reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduced display notification is started (step S4506).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

  When executing the second instruction notification, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

  51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the demonstration display control process. In the demonstration display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demonstration command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if not set, proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702). If it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state.

  In the normal state, the production control CPU 201 sets a first demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demonstration display is started (step S4703). A first demonstration standby flag indicating that the first demonstration display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demonstration standby flag is set (step S4706). If the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. Thus, the first demonstration display is not executed when the first special symbol variation is started or the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the variation of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, if a variation pattern command indicating variation in the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. In step S4708, when the second jackpot start designation command is received, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol.

  When the first demonstration standby flag is set, the first special symbol variation is not started (N in Step S4707), and the game state is not controlled based on the variation in the second special symbol (N in Step S4708). Then, the value of the first demonstration standby timer is decremented by 1 (step S4709), and when the first demonstration standby timer times out, the first demonstration display is started (step S4711), and the first demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

  Thereafter, when the first demonstration display is being performed (Y in step S4713), the production control CPU 201 starts the change of the first special symbol (Y of step S4714) or based on the variation of the second special symbol. If the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state (Y in step S4715), the first demonstration display is terminated (step S4716).

  Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process shifts to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802). If it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the state is the KT state.

  If it is in the KT state, the production control CPU 201 sets a second demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demonstration display is started (step S4803). A second demonstration standby flag indicating that the second demonstration display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demonstration standby flag is set (step S4806), and when it is set, when the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). Y), or when not in the KT state (N of step S4808), the process proceeds to step S4812. Thus, the second demonstration display is not executed when the second special symbol variation is started or the KT state is ended. Specifically, in step S4807, when a variation pattern command indicating variation in the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. In step S4808, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

  If the second demonstration standby flag is set, the second special symbol variation is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not ended (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demonstration standby timer Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demonstration standby timer times out, the second demonstration display is started (step S4811), and the second demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4812).

  Thereafter, the CPU 201 for effect control is displaying the second demonstration (Y in Step S4813), whether the variation of the second special symbol is started (Y in Step S4814), or the KT state is ended (Step S4814). N in S4815), the second demonstration display is terminated (step S4816).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the background symbol fluctuation start waiting process (step S900). In the background symbol variation start waiting process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S813). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), it is determined whether or not the production control CPU 201 executes the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step S814). Note that whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern # 01 to # 07. It can be determined by confirming. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the first special symbol variation display is to be executed, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S901) (step S816).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is a case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step S815). Note that whether or not the second special symbol variation display is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation pattern # 01 to # 32. It can be determined by confirming. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S901) (step S816).

  By executing the processing of steps S813 to S816, in this embodiment, when the state is the non-KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of the first special symbol. If it is executed and is in the KT state, the effect display device 9 performs the variable display of the background symbol in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. The background symbol variation display is not executed.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start process (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines a stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of place), the left middle right background symbol is completely inconsistent or only the left and right background symbols are matched. Reach out-of-reach symbol combinations. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when 16R probability variation big hit is determined), the combination of symbols in which the left middle right background symbols are arranged in odd numbers is determined. When a display result 3 designation command to a display result 8 designation command or a display result 10 designation command is received (when 9R probability variation big hit A to C or 6R probability variation big hit A to C, 2R probability variation big hit is determined). The combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right background symbols are even-numbered symbols is determined. Also, when a display result 9 designation command or a display result 11 designation command is received (when 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit is determined), the same combination as the out-of-reach symbols where only the left and right background symbols match To decide. Further, when the display result 12 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S921). If the 2nd KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the 2nd KT state), the production control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current variation start display is a variation display with reach (step S922). . Whether or not the display is a fluctuation display with reach can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the received fluctuation pattern command includes a reach. If the display is variable with reach, the process proceeds to step S924. If it is not the variable display with reach, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variable display to be started this time is a variable display that is a small hit (step S923). Whether or not the display is a variable display that is a small hit can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the received display result designation command is a display result 12 designation command. If it is not the variable display that is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S924. On the other hand, if it is a variable display that is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S930 as it is.

  When it is a variable display with reach (Y in Step S922) or when it is not a variable display that is a small hit (N in Step S923), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed on the effect display device 9. Control for changing the right-handed display (large) to the right-handed display (small) is performed (step S924). In step S924, for example, control is performed to change the large-size right-handed display displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to the small-size right-handed display. Then, control goes to a step S930.

  If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag are set (step S925). If at least one of the probability variation state flag or the first KT state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S930. If both the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag are set (that is, if high probability / first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays on the effect display device 9 according to the value of the variation counter. Control is performed to reduce the displayed item display (step S926).

  In this embodiment, when the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hits A to C and the 9R probability variable big hit A to C is finished, the display of the number of item displays corresponding to the big hit type is started (see step S9013). ). By executing the process of step S926, the item display is gradually reduced and displayed according to the remaining number of variable displays until the transition to the high probability / second KT state in the high probability / first KT state.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter is 1 (step S927). If the value of the variation counter is not 1, the process proceeds to step S930. If the value of the fluctuation counter is 1 (that is, the last fluctuation display in the high probability / first KT state and the transition to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the current fluctuation display) The effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current variation display is a big hit (step S928). Whether or not the current variable display is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 11 designation command. . If it is a fluctuation display that is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S930. If the variation display is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the background pattern variation pattern to be used and the second KT state transition effect according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. (Step S929). Then, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In this embodiment, when the last variation display in the high probability / first KT state is executed and is not a variation display that is a big hit, in steps S932 and 944 described later according to the process table selected in step S929. By executing the process, a second KT state transition effect is suggested that suggests transition to the second KT state during the background symbol variation display.

  In step S930, the production control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S930). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in steps S929 and S930 is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S931). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S932). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern in the background symbol display unit 9c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the background symbol variation time timer and starts the background symbol variation time timer (step S933). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S934).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S940) and decrements the value of the normal symbol variation time timer by 1 (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S944).

  Next, the CPU 201 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the display start timing for displaying the number of prize balls during consecutive games during the variation display of the background symbol (step S945). Note that whether or not it is the display start timing for displaying the number of prize balls during the consecutive game can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in step S933 of the background symbol variation start process. If it is the display start timing for the display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive games, the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize balls during the consecutive games on the effect display device 9 based on the current value of the first prize ball counter. It is displayed (step S946). In this embodiment, the special rush in-game ball number display is displayed when the second KT state is in effect (see step S9010 to be described later). When the display timing of the number display is reached, the processing of step S946 is executed, and in addition to the special rush in-game ball number display, the consecutive-game prize ball number display is also displayed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state has ended (step S947). Whether or not the second KT state has ended can be determined, for example, by checking the state of the second KT state flag. If the 2nd KT state is complete | finished, CPU201 for production control will complete | finish the sound output of the music for 2nd KT from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second KT state, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit as the trigger. (Refer to step S982 described later.) By executing the process of step S948, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 deletes the consecutive ball prize display and the special rush prize ball display on the effect display device 9 (step S949). In this embodiment, the character display such as “in special rush” is displayed in the second KT state, but the character display such as “in special rush” is also erased in step S949.

  Next, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is in a big hit variation of the second special symbol, and when the first special symbol variation starts (Y in step S950, Y in S951, Y in S952), the big hit A display in preparation is executed (step S953), and a display in preparation flag is set (step S954). In step S950, if neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set, it is determined that the normal state. In step S951, the process of changing the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process (step S705B). The display result 2 specifying command to the display result 5 specifying command and the display result 10 for the second decorative symbol are executed. If either the designated command or the display result 11 designated command is stored, it is determined that the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress. In step S952, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

  As described above, when starting the change of the first special symbol when the big hit change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the change of the first special symbol is forced to be out of force. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit a forced deviation designation command indicating that the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly removed from the presentation control microcomputer 200. In this case, the presentation control is performed. The microcomputer 200 may execute the big hit preparation display based on the reception of the forcible off designation command. Alternatively, only when the fluctuation display result is determined to be out of force, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is not determined other than forcible deviation, and the fluctuation pattern indicating this special fluctuation pattern The command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the variation pattern command. Good.

  Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S955), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) (step S956). ).

  56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the background symbol fluctuation stopping process (step S903) in the background symbol process. In the background symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without moving to step S974.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S989. In this embodiment, when a small hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S988. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, since the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game is not yet executed, the stop symbol of the background symbol of step S971 is displayed. The process moves to step S989 without executing the display process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 stops the stop symbol (out-of-line symbol, jackpot symbol of the left middle right background symbol being stopped and displayed in the effect display device 9. , Small hit symbol) is controlled (step S971).

  When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). . If any jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the production control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S978).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball number counter. (Step S980). That is, since a big hit occurs in the low probability / non-KT state, this is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball counter is reset.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current big hit is based on the 16R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit (step S981). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot is determined, for example, is a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating 16R probability variation jackpot or a display result designation command (display result 10) for designating 2R probability variation jackpot. This can be determined by checking whether or not a specified command is received. If the 16R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, the jackpot game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started, so the presentation control CPU 201 starts the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27. Control is performed (step S982).

  On the other hand, if neither the 16R probability variation big hit nor the 2R probability variation big hit is found, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if set (step S983). That is, in this case, when the second KT state is being reached, a big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit and the 2R probability variation big hit occur and the second KT state is terminated, so the second winning ball number counter is reset.

  In addition, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the variation counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step S984).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S985).

  If the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed in the process of step S971 (N in step S972), the CPU 201 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S986). When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S987), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hitting start designation command reception flag is set (step S989). When the small hitting start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hitting start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S990). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hitting start command reception flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S991). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit effect (step S992). Next, the production control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S993), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps as the effect part, and the speaker 27 as the effect part) is executed according to the data 1) (step S994).

  Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S995), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S996).

  On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S997 without executing the processes of steps S992 to S996. By executing the determination process of step S991, in this embodiment, the effect during the small hit game is executed only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special prize opening lamp 24a is turned on.

  In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special prize opening lamp 24a is turned on when a small hit is made during the second KT state is shown. I can't. For example, only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special prize opening lamp 24a may be executed. Further, for example, even in the second KT state, it may be configured not to execute either the output of the predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special prize opening lamp 24a. Alternatively, it may be configured not to execute the middle hit processing itself.

  Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting process (step S908) (step S997).

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S987), the effect control CPU 201 uses the second KT. It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S998A). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 determines that if the right-handed display displayed on the effect display device 9 is right-handed display (small), Control to change the right-handed display (small) to the right-handed display (large) is performed (step S998B). In step S998B, for example, control is performed to change the small-size right-handed display displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to the large-size right-handed display. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S999).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the jackpot game are completed in the post-round processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the production control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9002), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , The speaker 27 and the like) are controlled (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and switches the process data if the process timer has timed out (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S9006).

  If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the production control CPU 201 determines whether or not the big hit game to be ended this time is based on the 9R probability variable big hit A to C or the 6R probability variable big hit AC. Is confirmed (step S9007). Whether or not it is 9R probability variation big hits A to C or 6R probability variation big hits A to C, for example, a display result designation command for designating 9R probability variation big hits A to C (display result 3 designation command to display result 5 designation command) Alternatively, it can be determined by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 6 designation command to display result 8 designation command) for designating 6R probability variation big hits A to C is received. If it is 9R probability variation big hit A to C or 6R probability variation big hit A to C (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / first KT state after the big hit game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is not displayed, The effect display device 9 performs control to start display of the prize ball number display during the consecutive game based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of character display such as “during normal rush” on the effect display device 9.

  If none of 9R probability variable big hits A to C and 6R probability variable big hits A to C, the CPU 201 for effect control confirms whether the big hit game to be finished this time is based on the 16R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit ( Step S9009). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot is determined, for example, is a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating 16R probability variation jackpot or a display result designation command (display result) for designating 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by confirming whether or not (10 designation command) is received. If it is 16R probability variable big hit or 2R probability variable big hit (that is, if the high probability state / second KT state is reached after the big hit game is finished), the effect control CPU 201 is in the effect display device 9 if not displayed. Based on the second prize ball number counter, control for starting display of the number of prize balls during special rush is performed (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of character display such as “during special rush” on the effect display device 9.

  In FIG. 58, although not shown, if the big hit game that ends this time is based on a 6R normal big hit or a 2R normal big hit (that is, a low probability state / first KT state after the big hit game ends). If so, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying character display such as “chance time”.

  Further, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be ended this time is based on the 9R probability variation big hit A to C or the 6R probability variation big hit A to C (step S9011). Whether or not it is 9R probability variation big hits A to C or 6R probability variation big hits A to C, for example, a display result designation command for designating 9R probability variation big hits A to C (display result 3 designation command to display result 5 designation command) Alternatively, it can be determined by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 6 designation command to display result 8 designation command) for designating 6R probability variation big hits A to C is received. If it is 9R probability variation big hit A to C or 6R probability variation big hit A to C, the CPU 201 for effect control sets a value corresponding to the big hit type in the variation counter (step S9012). In step S9012, if 9R probability variation big hit A or 6R probability variation big hit A is set, "30" is set in the variation counter. Further, in the case of 9R probability variation big hit B or 6R probability variation big hit B, "50" is set in the fluctuation number counter. Further, in the case of 9R probability variation big hit C or 6R probability variation big hit C, “70” is set in the variation counter.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying the number of item displays corresponding to the jackpot type on the effect display device 9 (step S9013). In step S <b> 9013, for example, when 9R probability variation big hit A or 6R probability variation big hit A, the display of the item display is started by displaying three predetermined item images on the effect display device 9. Further, for example, in the case of 9R probability variation big hit B or 6R probability variation big hit B, the display of the item display is started by displaying five predetermined item images on the effect display device 9. Further, for example, in the case of 9R probability variation big hit C or 6R probability variation big hit C, the display of the item display is started by displaying seven predetermined item images on the effect display device 9.

  Then, the production control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9014).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the middle hit process (step S908) in the background symbol process. In the small hitting process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hitting end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hitting end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). Then, according to the contents of the process data n, processing for controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed (step S9203). That is, the performance corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

  However, as already described, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is not being established, the process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit is not set in the first place (see step S991), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if it is not, the production corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

  When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the presentation corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207 is performed. Migrate to Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

  Next, a display example on the effect display device 9 in the high probability / first KT state will be described. 60 and 61 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a display example on the effect display device 9 in the high probability / first KT state. 60 and 61, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C).

  When 9R probability variation big hit A to C or 6R probability variation big hit A to C occurs and shifts to the high probability / first KT state, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 has a high probability as shown in FIG. / Changed to the background screen according to the first KT state. In the example shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, it is assumed that 9R probability variation big hit C or 6R probability variation big hit C is generated and shifts to a high probability / first KT state. The case where the high probability / first KT state is maintained until is terminated is shown. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 60A, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is the background image A (high probability / background image corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays in the first KT state is 70 to 51). Is shown (see steps S643 and S644). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), as the background image A, for example, a screen in a mode indicating that the yacht 300 is sailing on the sea and the morning sun 301 rises and is in the morning time zone is displayed. The case to be shown is shown.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the right-handed display (small) 302 is displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the first KT state (see step S650). In the example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, a case where a small-size “right-handed” character display is displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the right-handed display (small) 302 is shown. Yes.

  Further, when the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 60A, display of the predetermined item image 303 is also started on the effect display device 9 (see step S9013). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), based on the fact that 9R probability variation big hit C or 6R probability variation big hit C has occurred (high probability / the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the first KT state is 70), The case where the display of an item display is started from the state where seven item images 303 are displayed is shown.

  Next, when the remaining number of variable displays in the high probability / first KT state is 50 times or less without generating a big hit, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is the background image as shown in FIG. A is changed to background image B (high probability / background image corresponding to the remaining number of times of variable display in the first KT state is 50 to 31) (see steps S645 and S646). In the example shown in FIG. 60B, as the background image B, for example, the yacht 300 is sailing over the sea, and the sun 304 rises to the sky high and is a time zone around noon. The case where the screen is displayed is shown.

  Further, the item image 303 is displayed in a reduced manner according to the remaining number of variable displays in the high probability / first KT state (see step S926). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (B), a case where the number of item images 303 is reduced to five based on the remaining number of times of variable display being 50 is shown.

  Next, when the remaining number of variable displays in the high probability / first KT state is 30 times or less without generating a big hit, as shown in FIG. 60C, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background image. B is changed to background image C (high probability / background image corresponding to 30 to 11 remaining display variations in the first KT state) (see steps S647 and S648). In the example shown in FIG. 60C, as the background image C, for example, a screen in a mode indicating that the yacht 300 is sailing on the sea and the moon 305 is up and it is a night time zone is displayed. The case is shown.

  Further, the item image 303 is displayed in a reduced manner according to the remaining number of variable displays in the high probability / first KT state (see step S926). The example shown in FIG. 60C shows a case where the number of item images 303 is reduced to three based on the fact that the remaining number of times of variable display is 30 times.

  Next, when the remaining number of variable displays in the high probability / first KT state is 10 or less without generating a big hit, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background image as shown in FIG. The background image D is changed from C to a background image D (a background image corresponding to 10 to 1 remaining display of fluctuation display in the high probability / first KT state) (see step S649). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (D), for example, a case where a screen of a mode in which the yacht 300 is sailing on the sea and is approaching the island 306 is displayed as the background image D is shown. Yes.

  Further, the item image 303 is displayed in a reduced manner according to the remaining number of variable displays in the high probability / first KT state (see step S926). The example shown in FIG. 60D shows a case where the number of item images 303 is reduced to one based on the fact that the remaining number of times of variable display is 10.

  Next, when the last variation display in the high probability / first KT state is reached without generating a big hit, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the second KT state transition effect is executed in the effect display device 9 (see step S929). ). In the example shown in FIG. 61 (E), a predetermined character 307 is displayed on the effect display device 9 as the second KT state transition effect, and a character display 308 such as “special rush transition!” Is displayed as the character 307 dialogue. The case to be shown is shown.

  Next, a display example of right-handed display in the high probability / second KT state will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of right-handed display in the high probability / second KT state. In FIG. 62, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

  When controlled to the high probability / second KT state, the right-handed display (large) 309 is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see step S655). In the example shown in FIG. 62A, a case where a large-size “right-handed!” Character display is displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the right-handed display (large) 309 is shown. Yes.

  Next, when a variable display with reach or a variable display that does not result in a small hit is executed during the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the right displayed on the effect display device 9 The strike display (large) 309 is changed to the right strike display (small) 310. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (B), a case where the character display of the large size “right-handed!” Is changed to the character display of the small size “right-handed!” Is shown.

  Then, when the variable display is terminated and the background symbol is stopped as a stop symbol, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the right-handed display (small) displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed. 310 is changed to the right-handed display (large) 309 again. The example shown in FIG. 62C shows a case where the character display of small size “right-handed!” Is changed to the character display of large-size “right-handed!”.

  60 and 61 show a display example of right-handed display in the high probability / first KT state, and FIG. 62 shows a display example of right-handed display in the high probability / second KT state. In the case of the low probability / first KT state, right-handed display (small) is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 60 and 61 (see steps S626 and S639).

  Next, a display example of full tank error notification will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display example of a full tank error notification. When a detection signal from the full tank switch 48 is input and a full tank error is detected, if a big hit game is currently being played, a full tank error notification (large) 313 is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. Is displayed (see step S660), and if it is not currently a big hit game (if it is not a big hit game, whether it is in a KT state or a non-KT state), as shown in FIG. 63 (B) Then, the full display error notification (small) 314 is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see step S661). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 63A, a predetermined character 311 is displayed based on the fact that a big hit game is being played, and a character display 312 such as “Don't hit big!” Is displayed as a line of the character 311. As a full tank error notification (large) 313, a large size character display such as “full tank error!” Is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 63 (B), as a full tank error notification (small) 314, a small character display such as “full tank” may be displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is shown.

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are explanatory views showing display examples of instruction notification in the present embodiment. The display example shown in FIG. 64 shows a display example of instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on the variation of the first special symbol. For example, first, the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (1), and the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol as shown in FIG. 64 (2). Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters “right-handed” and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 64 (4).

  At this time, the second normal instruction notification 55B includes the characters “Aim at the gate” and an image showing the game ball passing through the operation gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball passes indicates the operation gate 17). , And a square area above it indicates the gate 32).

  In the display example shown in FIG. 65, the display example of the instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (1), the first demo display is performed because the first special symbol is not changed in spite of being in the normal state, and the big hit fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is performed. Has been done. When the change of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), the big hit preparation in-progress display is performed and the preparation in-progress display flag is set, and then in FIG. 65 (3). As shown, the variation of the second special symbol ends with the big hit symbol. At this time, since the ready display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 65 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. In addition, the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. May be.

  At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters “right-handed” and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B is activated with the characters “Aim at the gate”. By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball passes shows the operating gate 17 and the square area above it shows the gate 32). Done.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (6), when the variation of the second special symbol is completed in the big hit symbol without the variation of the first special symbol, the first reduction is performed as illustrated in FIG. 65 (7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 65 (8).

  The first reduction instruction notification 56C at this time is performed by displaying only an image indicating the characters “right-handed”. In addition, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image indicating the characters “Aim at the gate”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the big hit preparation is displayed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. When the operation is not performed, the execution of the big hit preparation display is restricted (not executed).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the variation of the first special symbol is performed, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification having lower visibility than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed.

  FIG. 66 is a timing chart when the big hit gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 66 shows whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled, whether or not the high base flag and the KT flag are set, whether or not the normal symbol variation is executed, whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, and the second special symbol. The presence or absence of fluctuation and the presence or absence of opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 are shown for each timing.

  For example, while controlled in the big hit gaming state (before timing T0 in FIG. 66), the normal symbol variation time is 1.0 second, the normal symbol variation stop time is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol is hit. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 while being controlled in the big hit gaming state is 1.0 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol, This is 3.8 seconds, which is 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. Note that, while being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the change of the special symbol and the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 are not performed.

  Further, while controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 66), the normal symbol variation time is 0.2 seconds, the normal symbol variation stop time is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol is hit. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state is 0.2 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol, It is 0.5 seconds obtained by adding 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. In addition, the first second symbol change time after the control to the first KT state is 7.0 seconds, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds at the time of the small hit, and the first KT state is 0.8 seconds. 1.0 seconds (assuming that the second reserved memory number ≧ 1) is set as the second special symbol variation time after the second control.

  At this time, the variation time (7) of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state rather than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state. .0 seconds) is longer. For example, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds when the waiting before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened immediately before the timing T0. If the variation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, It is conceivable that a game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 in the first KT state. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is increased so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be opened while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the special state (in this example, the small hit gaming state) which is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and is advantageous to the player Can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) with an increased frequency of control in the special state, and as the special state, the first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and The second special state (in this example, the second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state can be controlled. In addition, when controlling to the first special state, it is difficult for a game medium (game ball in this example) to enter the specific area (in this example, the special winning opening 24) as compared to controlling to the second special state. (In this example, in the first KT state, by controlling to the high base state so as to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, it is difficult to win the special prize opening 24) . Further, when controlling to the first special state, it is possible to control to the second special state based on execution of variable display a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times, 50 times, or 70 times). There is (in this example, if the high probability / first KT state is controlled after the big hit game based on the 9R probability variable big hit A to C or 6R probability variable big hit A to C, the big hit is not generated 30 times, 50 times. Or, when the display of 70 fluctuations is finished, the high probability / the second KT state is controlled). Therefore, the monotony of game play when controlling to a special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952, the gameability in the special state is monotonous, and it cannot be said that the interest of the game when controlling to the special state is sufficiently improved. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when controlling to the first special state, the second special state may be controlled based on the execution of variable display a predetermined number of times. It is possible to eliminate the monotony of game play when controlling to a special state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the entry advantageous state (open state in this example) in which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter and the entry disadvantageous state (in this example) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Is provided with a normally variable device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to a closed state, variable display of first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and second identification information ( In this example, variable display of the second special symbol) can be performed, and the normally variable device can be controlled by a plurality of types of control patterns (in this example, as shown in FIG. There are cases of opening for 5.5 seconds and opening for 0.2 seconds). In addition, the specific area is usually arranged on the downstream side of the variable device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 22 having the special winning opening 24 is arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning ball device 15). The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be performed simultaneously (in this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously), When the special state is controlled, the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a short variable display period compared to the case where the special state is not controlled (in this example, in FIGS. 12 to 14). As shown, in the case of the KT state, a variation pattern of 1 second, 2 seconds, or 5 seconds may be selected that is not selected in the non-KT state). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it can be controlled to a special state at a higher rate than in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the second special information is controlled). Only when the symbol display is performed, it may be determined to be a small hit), and when controlled to the first special state, the rate is higher than when controlled to the second special state. The normally variable device can be controlled by a special control pattern for making it difficult to flow the game medium to a specific area among a plurality of types of control patterns (in this example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, By opening the variable winning ball device 15 for a long period of 5.5 seconds, it is difficult to flow the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side). Therefore, it is possible to realize a game with different degrees of advantage in the first special state and that in the second special state, and improve the fun of the game.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation big hit, 9R probability variation big hit A to C, 6R probability variation big hit A to C, 6R normal big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 2R normal big hit) The predetermined number of times includes a plurality of types of times (30 times, 50 times, and 70 times in this example). Then, it is possible to control to the second special state based on the execution of variable display of a predetermined number of times depending on the type of advantageous state (in this example, 9R probability variation big hit A or 6R probability variation big hit A becomes. When the display of 30 fluctuations is finished, it shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and when it becomes 9R probability variation big hit B or 6R probability variation big hit B, it is high when 50 times of fluctuation display is finished. When the probability / second KT state is reached and the 9R probability variation big hit C or the 6R probability variation big hit C is reached, the transition to the high probability / second KT state is made when the 70 times of the variation display is finished. Therefore, when controlled to the advantageous state, attention can be paid to the predetermined number of types, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 9R probability variation big hits A to C, 6R probability variation big hits AC) which have a common advantage degree in the advantageous state and differ in the predetermined number of times. It can be controlled. Therefore, when controlled to the advantageous state, attention can be paid not only to the degree of advantage in the advantageous state, but also to a predetermined number of times, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit game is the same as the mode with the same degree of advantage, and is controlled to the same gaming state after the big hit game (in this example, the big hit is in 9R probability variable big hits A to C). The number of rounds in the game is the same 9 rounds, the 6R probability change big hits A to C are the same 6 rounds in the big hit game, both are controlled to the probability change state after the big hit game) It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the number of rounds during a jackpot game may be the same, but the game state after the jackpot game may be different between the probability change state and the high base state, and conversely, the game state after the jackpot game is the same, but the jackpot game The number of rounds inside may be different, and it is sufficient if they have at least a common advantage.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the first special state is controlled, the suggestion effect (in this example, FIG. 60) suggests the remaining number of times until the predetermined number of variable displays are executed. Display of the item image 303 shown in FIG. For this reason, the presentation mode of the suggestion effect changes depending on the remaining number of times until the predetermined number of variable displays is executed, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the first special state is controlled, the display mode of the predetermined display can be changed corresponding to the remaining number of times until the predetermined number of variable displays is executed. Possible (in this example, as shown in FIG. 60, the background images A to D are changed according to the remaining number of times of variable display). Therefore, since the display mode of the predetermined display changes depending on the remaining number of times until the predetermined number of variable displays is executed, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the entry advantageous state (open state in this example) in which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter and the entry disadvantageous state (in this example) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Then, a normal variable device (in this example, a variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed to a closed state) is provided, and variable display state control information (in this example, a KT flag) for controlling variable display is used. Ordinary variable device state control information for controlling a normal variable device, which is variable information that can be executed (in this example, a variation pattern is selected using a KT flag) and is different from the variable display state control information. Normally variable devices can be controlled using (in this example, a high base flag). Therefore, the state of the gaming machine can be managed appropriately.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, in the case of being controlled to the first special state, a notification effect for informing that the control is performed to the second special state based on the execution of variable display a predetermined number of times. (In this example, the second KT state transition effect shown in FIG. 61E) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player that the player is controlled to the second special state by executing the notification effect, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and advantageous to the player. The special state (in this example, the KT state) with an increased frequency of control in the special state can be controlled. As the special state, the first special state (in the present example, the first KT state) and the first special state It is possible to control to the second special state (in this example, the second KT state), which is more advantageous than the state. In addition, when controlling to the first special state, it is difficult for a game medium (game ball in this example) to enter the specific area (in this example, the special winning opening 24) as compared to controlling to the second special state. (In this example, in the first KT state, by controlling to the high base state so as to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, it is difficult to win the special prize opening 24) . In the case of controlling to the second special state, when it is controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to the second special state at a high rate after the advantageous state is finished (in this example, as shown in FIG. 33). Thus, once controlled to the high probability / second KT state, the probability change hits at a rate of 65% and is again controlled to the high probability / second KT state). Therefore, the monotony of game play when controlling to a special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952, the gameability in the special state is monotonous, and it cannot be said that the interest of the game when controlling to the special state is sufficiently improved. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the second special state is controlled, when the advantageous state is controlled, the second special state is controlled at a high rate after the advantageous state is terminated. Therefore, the monotony of game play when controlling to a special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a plurality of kinds of advantageous states (in this example, 16R accuracy variation big hit, 9R accuracy variation big hit A to C, 6R probability variation big hit A to C, 6R normal big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 2R normal big hit) When the control is performed in the second special state, the advantage is obtained when the control is controlled to a specific type of advantageous state (in this example, 9 to R or 6R probability variation per hit). It is possible to control to the second special state after the state is finished (in this example, as shown in FIG. 33, when 9R probability variation big hit A to C or 6R probability variation big hit AC is obtained in the high probability / second KT state, High probability / controlled to 2nd KT state). Therefore, once controlled to the second special state, it becomes easy to repeatedly control to the second special state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when controlled to the first special state, when it is controlled to a specific kind of advantageous state (in this example, 9R probability variation per hit AC, 6R probability variation per hit AC) In addition, after the advantageous state is finished, it is possible to control to the first special state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 33, in the high probability / first KT state, the 9R probability variation big hits A to C and the 6R probability variation big hits AC Then, it is controlled to the high probability / the first KT state again), and when it is controlled to a special kind of advantageous state (in this example, 16R probability variation per hit, 2R probability variation per hit) when controlled to the first special state. In addition, after the advantageous state is finished, it is possible to control to the second special state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit becomes high probability / first KT state, Control to 2nd KT state To). Therefore, it is possible to give an inflection to the game, and to focus attention on the type of advantageous state that occurs when the game is controlled to the first special state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, it is controllable to the predetermined state (in this example, the probability variation state (high probability state)) that is easily controlled to the advantageous state, and when the second special state is controlled, the predetermined type (In this example, 6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), it is possible to control to the first special state that is not controlled to a predetermined state after the advantageous state is finished (in this example, FIG. 33, when the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the low probability / first KT state is controlled). Therefore, anxiety that the player may be brought back to a disadvantageous state can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, once it is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, it shows a case where it is controlled to the high probability / second KT state again with a probability variation of 65%. For example, when a big hit is made in the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT state may be controlled again at a rate of 100%.

  In this embodiment, in the high probability / second KT state, any probability variation big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 9R probability variation big hit A to C, 6R probability variation big hit A to C, 2R probability variation big hit) In addition, although the case where the high probability / the second KT state is controlled again is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the probability variation big hit is high probability / second KT state, there may be a kind of probability variation big hit that is not controlled to the second KT state (controlled to the first KT state or the non-KT state).

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in the high probability / second KT state has been shown is pulled back to the low probability / first KT state. For example, it may be configured to be pulled back to the non-KT state.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (in this example, a game control microcomputer 560) and an effect control means for controlling the effect based on information from the game control means ( In this example, a production control microcomputer 200) is provided. The game control means includes a first hold storage means (in this example, a first hold storage buffer) for storing information relating to variable display of the first identification information, and information relating to variable display of the second identification information. A special state that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and is advantageous to the player, including second holding storage means (second holding storage buffer in this example) that stores as the reserved storage. (In this example, it is controllable to a small hit game state), it is controllable to a special state (in this example, KT state) with an increased frequency of control in the special state, and information (in this example, effect control) Command) can be output to the effect control means. Further, the effect control means corresponds to the variable display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information depending on whether or not it is controlled to a special state, in the effect identification information (in this example, Variable display of the background pattern can be executed. Further, the first information (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display designation command) is controlled based on the fact that there is no holding storage stored in the first holding storage means when the variable display of the first identification information is finished. The second information (in this example, the second customer waiting demo display designation is based on the fact that there is no holding storage stored in the second holding storage means when the variable display of the second identification information is finished. Command) can be output to the effect control means. Therefore, information regarding the variable display state of the two identification information can be appropriately output to the effect control means.

  For example, in a gaming machine configured to be capable of simultaneously executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, such as a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952, the two identification information It is necessary to appropriately output information related to the variable display state to the effect control means. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the first information is output to the effect control means based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored in the first hold storage means when the variable display of the first identification information is finished. Since the second information can be output to the effect control means based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored in the second hold storage means when the variable display of the second identification information is finished, the two identification information The information regarding the variable display state can be appropriately output to the effect control means.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the state is controlled to a special state can be output to the effect control means. In addition, when the production control means is controlled in the special state, the production in the absence (based on the present) is based on the reception of the second information regardless of whether or not the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In the example, display of the second demonstration display) can be executed. Therefore, the absence presentation can be executed at an appropriate timing in a gaming machine configured to be capable of simultaneously executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the state is controlled to a special state can be output to the effect control means. In addition, when the presentation control means is not controlled in the special state, the presentation in absence (based on the absence of the second identification information, whether or not the variable display of the second identification information is executed) In the example, display of the first demonstration display) can be executed. Therefore, the absence presentation can be executed at an appropriate timing in a gaming machine configured to be capable of simultaneously executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information.

  In this embodiment, the case where the first demonstration display and the second demonstration display are displayed based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a predetermined menu guidance image display is displayed based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command during the non-KT state, or the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received during the KT state. A predetermined menu guidance image display may be displayed based on the above. In this case, for example, as a predetermined menu guidance image display, a guidance screen for switching the effect mode, adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal screen or LED, or adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is displayed. You may make it display.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the state is controlled to a special state can be output to the effect control means. In addition, when not controlled to the special state, the variable display of the effect identification information can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the variable display of the first special symbol in the non-KT state) In the present example, the variable display of the effect identification information can be executed in correspondence with the variable display of the second identification information when the background state is controlled (in this example). In the KT state, the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the second special symbol variation display). In addition, the effect control means corresponds to predetermined identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol, the second symbol) having lower visibility than the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (In this example, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbol. (2) A special symbol change display is executed. Therefore, variable display of the production identification information by variable display of the predetermined identification information while differentiating the identification information of the target of the variable display of the production identification information with high visibility depending on whether or not it is controlled to a special state It is also possible to notify the variable display state of the identification information that is not the target.

  In this embodiment, as the variable display of the predetermined identification information with low visibility, the variable display of the first decorative pattern on the first variable display portion 9a provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the effect display Although the case where the display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b provided on the display screen of the device 9 is executed has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol may be executed by lighting and displaying an LED or a lamp provided outside the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device).

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the state is controlled to a special state can be output to the effect control means. Further, the effect control means can execute a movable member position detection process (in this example, a movable member initial operation process). In this case, when not controlled to the special state, the position detection process can be executed based on the reception of the first information regardless of whether or not the variable display of the second identification information is executed ( In this example, in the non-KT state, the movable member initial operation process is executed when the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received), and when the special state is controlled, the variable display of the first identification information is executed. Regardless of whether the second information is received or not, the position detection process can be executed (in this example, in the KT state, when the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received, the movable member Perform initial operation processing). Therefore, the position detection process of the movable member can be executed at an appropriate timing.

  In this embodiment, the case where the background designation command is transmitted in such a manner that the gaming state can be specified is shown as information corresponding to whether or not the state is controlled to the special state (see FIG. 17). It is not limited to this aspect. For example, it is configured to transmit a state designation command that designates a gaming state of low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, and high probability / second KT state. May be.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a special state (in this example, a small hit) that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and advantageous to the player based on the execution of variable display. It is possible to control to a special state (a KT state in this example) with an increased frequency of control to a special state. In addition, a launch promotion notification (in this example, a right-handed display) for prompting a launch operation of a game medium (game ball in this example) to a predetermined route (in this example, to the right of the game area 7) is provided. It is feasible. In this case, when controlled to a special state, the firing promotion notification can be executed in a predetermined manner (in this example, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9). During display of variable display based on the fact that the large-size “right-handed!” Character display is displayed) and the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period (in this example, it is variable display with reach). The firing promotion notification can be executed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), from the large-size “right-handed!” Character display to the small-sized “right-handed! ”). Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate firing promotion notification by changing the mode of firing promotion notification depending on the type of variable display.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086643, the mode of launch promotion notification is uniform when controlled to a special state, and appropriate launch promotion notification cannot always be executed. Specifically, for example, when variable display with reach is executed, the variable time is generally long, and even if it is hit to the right, it is not possible to expect winning in the big winning opening or special winning opening 24 immediately, so there is no small hit. Even when the variable display is executed, even if it is right-handed, it cannot be expected to win the big prize opening or special prize opening 24 immediately. In the same manner, the firing promotion notification (in this example, the display of a right-handed display) is executed, and if the player continues to perform a right-handed operation, the game ball that has been fired is consumed unnecessarily, and the game There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the person will increase. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when it is controlled to a special state, it is possible to execute the firing promotion notification in a predetermined manner, and the variable display period is variable based on the predetermined period or longer. Since the firing promotion notification can be executed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode during display execution, it is possible to execute appropriate firing promotion notification by changing the mode of the firing promotion notification depending on the type of variable display. .

  In this embodiment, the case where the display is switched to the small-size right-handed display as the firing promotion notification according to the specific mode is shown. However, the variable display period is not less than the predetermined period. On the basis of this, it may be configured so that the firing promotion notification is not temporarily performed (for example, the right-handed display is temporarily deleted).

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which it is determined whether or not the variable display period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by determining whether or not the variable display with reach is performed. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by confirming the fluctuation time itself based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command and determining whether or not the fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the firing promotion notification according to a specific mode You may comprise so that it may switch to.

  Also, in this embodiment, if the display is variable with reach, at the start of the change, the predetermined mode (in this example, large size) is switched to the specific mode (in this example, small size) and the launch promotion notification (this In the example, a case of right-handed display) is shown, but the timing of switching is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, the predetermined mode may be switched to the specific mode at the timing before the reach occurrence during the variation display, or the predetermined mode may be switched to the specific mode at the timing after the reach occurs.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the firing promotion notification is executed in a specific manner during the variable display, a predetermined display result that does not correspond to the operation of the variable device is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Based on the above, it is possible to change from the specific mode to the predetermined mode and execute the firing promotion notification (in this example, as shown in FIG. , The small-size “right-handed!” Character display is changed to the large-sized “right-handed!” Character display). For this reason, it is possible to change the mode of firing promotion notification at an appropriate timing.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the special state, the first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and the second special state (in this example, the first special state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. 2KT state). Moreover, when controlled to the first special state, the firing promotion notification can be executed in a special mode different from the case controlled to the second special state (in this example, shown in FIGS. 60 and 61). Thus, a small-size “right-handed” character display is displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9). Therefore, the change of the aspect of the firing promotion notification when controlled to the second special state can be emphasized.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (in this example, it is a variable display with reach), or the display result of the variable display is not controlled to a special state. Based on that the display result to be derived is displayed (in this example, it is not a variable display that is a small hit), it is possible to execute the firing promotion notification in a specific manner during the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to execute launch promotion notification in a specific manner corresponding to a period during which no profit is obtained.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect (reach in this example) is executed, the firing promotion notification can be executed in a specific mode during execution of variable display, and the specific mode is more than the predetermined mode. The firing promotion notification can be executed in a mode in which the degree of recognition is low (in this example, the right-handed display 310 is changed to a smaller size than the right-handed display (large) 309 as shown in FIG. 62). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect while prompting the player to stop the launch operation.

  In this embodiment, the case where the large-size right-handed display (large) 309 is displayed as the predetermined mode and the small-size right-handed display 310 is displayed as the specific mode is shown. I can't. For example, the right-handed display is displayed in a relatively conspicuous display color such as red or rainbow as a predetermined aspect, and the right-handed display is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color such as blue or green as a specific aspect. May be. Also, for example, a right-handed display is displayed at a relatively conspicuous location such as near the center of the display screen as a predetermined mode, and a right-handed display is displayed at a relatively inconspicuous location such as an end of the display screen as a specific mode. May be. Further, for example, it may be configured to switch between a predetermined mode and a specific mode depending on whether or not animation is displayed. In this case, for example, a right-handed display is performed as an animation display in which the right-pointing arrow display sequentially moves as a predetermined aspect, and a right-pointing arrow display is stationary as a specific aspect. A right-handed display may be performed. As long as the right-handed display is displayed in a form that is conspicuous as a predetermined form, and the right-handed display is displayed in a form that is not conspicuous as a specific form.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, KT state) that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and is advantageous to the player. Further, based on the fact that the number of game media (game balls in this example) stored in the storage unit (in this example, surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4) exceeds a predetermined number, a specific notification (book In the example, the full tank error notification shown in FIG. 63 can be executed. In this case, the specific notification can be executed in a predetermined manner when controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 63A, when the big hit game is being played, the effect display device 9, a full tank error notification (large) 313 is displayed), and when it is controlled to the special state, the specific notification can be executed in a specific mode having a lower recognition degree than the predetermined mode (in this example, FIG. As shown in B), in the KT state, the effect display device 9 displays a full tank error notification (small) 314). Therefore, appropriate specific notification can be executed in accordance with the game state.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-051137, the specific notification mode is uniform between the case where it is controlled to the advantageous state and the case where it is controlled to the special state. Notification cannot be executed. Specifically, as shown in this embodiment, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable to the special state (KT state), the variation display result of the second special symbol may be out of sync. In some cases, or when a plurality of nails are provided on the flow path to the special winning opening 24 to make it difficult to win a prize, a certain amount of game balls are stored in the storage part (dish) during a small hit game in a special state. There is a need. However, if a certain amount of game balls are removed from the storage section (dish) according to the specific notification (full tank error notification) under such circumstances, it becomes necessary to frequently replenish the game balls in a special state. When viewed from the person's perspective, it may be inappropriate notification. In addition, even in a gaming machine that does not have a special state (KT state), if a big hit is not won in the high base state, the game ball can continue to decrease from the storage unit (dish), so a specific notification ( If a certain amount of game balls are pulled out from the storage part (dish) according to the full tank error notification), it will be necessary to replenish the game balls frequently, which may be inappropriate notification from the player's perspective. is there. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when being controlled in the advantageous state, the specific notification can be executed in a predetermined manner, and when being controlled in the special state, the recognition degree is higher than that in the predetermined manner. Since the specific notification can be executed in a low specific mode, it is possible to execute appropriate specific notification corresponding to the state of the game.

  In this embodiment, a case where large size full tank error notification is performed as a predetermined mode and a small size full tank error notification is performed as a specific mode is shown. However, the present embodiment is not limited to such a mode. For example, a specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed with a relatively conspicuous display color such as red or rainbow as the predetermined mode, and a specific notification is performed with a relatively inconspicuous display color such as blue or green (full tank error notification) as the specific mode. You may comprise so that it may perform. Also, for example, a specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed at a relatively conspicuous location such as near the center of the display screen as a predetermined mode, and a specific notification (full tank error notification is performed at a relatively inconspicuous location such as an end of the display screen as a specific mode. (In this case, when specific notification (full tank error notification) is made at the end of the display screen, etc., at a display location that does not interfere with other effects such as reach effects and notice effects) It is desirable to perform specific notification (full tank error notification). In addition, for example, when the display device (liquid crystal display device) is configured to include a main display device and a sub display device, a specific notification (full error notification) in the main display device and the sub display device as a predetermined mode. The specific notification (full tank error notification) may be performed only in the sub display device as the specific mode. Further, a specific notification (full tank error notification) accompanied by an output of a predetermined notification sound or a large volume is performed as a predetermined mode, and a specific notification without a predetermined notification sound output or a low volume (full tank error notification) as a specific mode You may comprise so that it may perform. Further, the specific notification (full tank error notification) with a large number of predetermined notification displays is performed as the predetermined mode, and the specific notification (full tank error notification) with a small number of predetermined notification displays is performed as the specific mode. Also good. Moreover, you may comprise so that the specific alerting | reporting (full error alerting | reporting) from which the light emission mode of LED and a lamp differs by a predetermined mode and a specific mode may be performed. As long as the specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed in a form that is conspicuous as the predetermined mode, and the specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed in a mode that is not conspicuous as the specific mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, only when specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed, switching from the predetermined mode to the specific mode is performed, and the display mode is not switched regarding other errors. For example, the display mode is not switched for an error other than a full tank error such as a door opening error, a ball break error, a winning ball error, a radio wave error, a magnetic error, a vibration error, and an abnormal winning. In other words, these errors are highly important errors and have no meaning of reducing the visibility, and are configured to be displayed in a manner that is easily visible at all times.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even when not controlled to a special state, it is possible to execute specific notification by a specific mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), in a non-KT state) In some cases, the full display error notification (small) 314 is displayed on the effect display device 9). Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate specific notification even when the state is not controlled in a special state where it is difficult to obtain profit.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a full tank error alert | report may be performed in the aspect which is not restricted to the aspect shown by this embodiment, for example in a KT state and a non-KT state. Further, the full tank error notification may be executed in a different manner between the first KT state and the second KT state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be performed. Can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and the special state (in this example, the KT state) and advantageous to the player It is. The special state is a state in which the frequency of control to the special state is increased, and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be performed simultaneously (in this example, the first special information is displayed). The variable display of the symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time), and when the special state is controlled, the second variable display period is shorter than when the special state is not controlled. The variable display of the identification information can be executed (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in the KT state, the variation time not selected in the non-KT state is 1 second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds. May be selected). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it can be controlled to a special state at a higher rate than in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the second special information is controlled). It may be determined as a small hit only when the symbol change display is executed). Therefore, appropriate specific notification can be executed in a special state where the degree of increase in profit is lower than that in the advantageous state.

  In this embodiment, a case in which an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 is provided in addition to the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is shown. However, an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 is provided. Instead, the gaming machine may be configured to provide only the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 and the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 may be provided with an opening for ball removal. That is, the storage unit (in this example, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3) is provided with a payout passage (in this example, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3) through which the game medium to be paid out (in this example, the game ball) passes. Is provided between the passage on the entrance side) and the launch passage (in this example, the passage on the exit side of the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3) through which the game medium to be launched passes, and can be opened and closed by the player's operation. An opening for discharging a game medium (in this example, an opening for ball removal) may be provided. According to such a configuration, when the opening provided in the storage unit is in an open state, it is possible to execute appropriate specific notification when the number of stored game media that can be launched cannot be secured. .

  In the embodiment described above, for example, the winning ball number display may be highlighted in the second KT state in which a special winning opening 24 can be expected. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the prize ball number display is highlighted in the second KT state will be described.

  In the embodiment described above, the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter are separately provided, and the number of prize balls in the extended game and the number of prize balls in the second KT state are separately provided. Although the case of counting is shown, in this modified example, only one winning ball number counter is used, regardless of whether the game is in consecutive games or in the second KT state, during the big hit game and the KT state, It is assumed that the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the mouth and the special winning opening 24 is cumulatively counted.

  Further, in the present modification, during the first KT state, the display of the number of prize balls is displayed on the effect display device 9 by the first KT pattern. For example, a prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, during the second KT state, the prize display is displayed on the effect display device 9 by the second KT pattern. For example, a prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, during the big hit game, the effect display device 9 displays the number of prize balls by the big hit pattern. For example, a prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  In the present modification, the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) is acquired during the big hit game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) in the effect control main process. The award ball number display process for controlling the display of the award ball number display indicating the awarded ball number is executed. Further, in the present modification, 15 prize balls are paid out both when one game ball is won at the big prize opening and when one game ball is won at the special prize opening 24.

  FIG. 67 to FIG. 70 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display processing in the modification. In the winning ball number display process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not the big winning opening winning flag is set (step S500). If the big prize winning flag is set (that is, if a big prize winning is generated), the production control CPU 201 resets the big prize winning flag (step S501), and the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increasing effect executing flag indicating that the ball increasing effect is being executed is set (step S502). If the first prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S506.

  If the first prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to win the prize ball at the first speed. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting the first prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S503). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets a first prize ball increasing effect executing flag (step S504). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In this modified example, the winning ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or the KT state (the first KT state, the second KT state), but when the winning ball number display is displayed, When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls shown in the prize ball number display increases one by one. In the present modification, there are three types of prize ball increasing effects: a first prize ball increasing effect to a third prize ball increasing effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number increases by one at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 second) when the prize ball number display by the big hit pattern is displayed during the big hit game. This is an effect that is executed in such a manner as to do. Further, the second prize ball increasing effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 second) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed during the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that it increases by one. Further, the third prize ball increasing effect is obtained when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed during the second KT state at the relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that it increases by one.

  In this modified example, the winning flag winning flag is set (a winning to the winning ticket has occurred) is a case where a winning game is displayed and the winning ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed. From step S503, the first prize ball increasing effect is started in which the number of prize balls increases by one at the first speed in the prize ball number display displayed by the big hit pattern.

  If the grand prize winning flag has not been set (that is, if no winning has been made for the big prize opening), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first prize ball increasing effect executing flag has been set. Is confirmed (step S505). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increasing effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increasing effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S510.

  If the first prize-ball increasing effect execution flag is set in step S502 or step S505 (that is, if the first prize-ball increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays a prize in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 second has elapsed since the start of the effect of increasing the number of winning balls by 1) (step S506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number counter after the prize ball number is increased by one. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S507). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number has increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again uses the effect display device 9 to win the prize ball at the first speed. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting the first prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S508). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

  If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number has increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball increase effect execution flag ( Step S509), the first prize ball increasing effect is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In this modified example, when a winning in the big winning game occurs during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 winning balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and 15 is immediately added to the winning ball counter. However, by executing the processing of steps S500 to S509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value obtained by adding 15, but in the first speed (in this example, 0.1 seconds). ), The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball number is incremented by one. Therefore, in this modified example, it takes 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 seconds until the update of all 15 winning balls is completed with respect to a single winning prize opening. The display is updated. In this case, there may be a case where a winning to the next big winning opening occurs before the update of the number of all 15 winning balls is completed. For example, the fifth of 15 winning balls Even if the next prize winning slot is displayed at the stage where the increase in the number of winning balls has only been displayed until then, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth winning balls is increased continues. The first prize ball increase effect will continue to be executed until the display of the increase in the number of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added for the new winning is completed (in this case, additional The number of award balls is updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of award balls generated in step 3). However, in this modified example, when the first prize-ball increasing effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least until the big hit game ends. Is configured to end the effect of increasing the number of all prize balls.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening prize flag is set (step S510). If the special winning award winning flag is set (that is, if a winning to the special winning award 24 has occurred), the effect control CPU 201 resets the special winning award winning flag (step S511), and the second KT. It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the CPU 201 for effect control confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process is ended as it is. That is, even if a special prize opening 24 is rarely generated during the non-KT state, the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, so that the process is terminated without performing a prize ball increase effect.

  If the first KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 is executing the second prize ball increasing effect indicating that the second prize ball increasing effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S514). If the second prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the second prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S519.

  If the second prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to win the prize ball at the first speed. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting the second prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S515). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets a second prize ball increasing effect executing flag (step S516). Then, control goes to a step S540.

  In the present modification, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the award ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed, so that the display is performed by the first KT pattern in step S515. In the displayed number of prize balls, a second prize ball increase effect is started in which the number of prize balls increases by one at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example).

  If the special winning award winning flag is not set (that is, if the special winning opening 24 has not been won), the third prize ball increasing effect is executed indicating that the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S517). If the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S533. If the third prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect execution effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second prize ball increase effect execution flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S518). If the second prize ball increasing effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increasing effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S540.

  If the second prize-ball increasing effect execution flag is set in step S514 or step S518 (that is, if the second prize-ball increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays a prize in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 second has elapsed since the start of the effect of increasing the number of winning balls by 1) (step S519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number counter after the prize ball number is increased by one. (Step S520). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number has increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again uses the effect display device 9 to win the prize ball at the first speed. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and a control for starting the second prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S521). Then, control goes to a step S540.

  If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number increases by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball increase effect execution flag ( Step S522), the second prize ball increasing effect is ended. Then, control goes to a step S540.

  In this modified example, when a winning to the special winning opening 24 occurs in the small hit game generated in the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30) and the prize is immediately given. Although 15 is added to the ball counter, the award ball number display is not immediately updated to the value added with 15 by executing the processing of steps S510 to S522, but the first speed ( In this example, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 in 0.1 second). Therefore, in the present modification, in the first KT state, 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 seconds until the update of the number of all 15 prize balls is completed with respect to a single winning in the special winning opening 24. The award ball number display is updated over time. In this case, there may be a case where a winning to the next special winning opening 24 occurs before the update of all 15 winning balls is completed. For example, 5 of 15 winning balls Even when the winning prize is displayed at the next special prize opening 24 at the stage where only the increase in the number of prize balls has been displayed up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls is continuously increased is displayed. And the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case) In addition, the number of prize balls will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in addition). However, in this modification, when the second prize-ball increasing effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is finished. By the end, the production in which all the number of prize balls is increased is completed.

  If the second KT state flag is set in step S512 (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start the effect effect in the effect display device 9 (step S523). Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not a winning effect execution flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S524). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S525). Then, control goes to a step S529.

  If the winning effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays a prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) on the effect display device 9. Is controlled (step S526), and the effect display device 9 is controlled to start a winning effect (step S527). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets a winning effect executing flag (step S528). Then, control goes to a step S529.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not a third prize ball increasing effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed is set (step S529). If the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S533.

  If the third prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect has not been executed yet), the effect control CPU 201 displays the second KT pattern on the effect display device 9. Control for starting the enlarged display of the displayed number of prize balls is performed (step S530). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 starts an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed on the effect display device 9, and performs control to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S531). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets a third prize ball increasing effect executing flag (step S532). Then, control goes to a step S540.

  In the present modification, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the award ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed, so that the display is performed by the second KT pattern in step S531. In the enlarged display of the number of prize balls, a third prize ball increase effect is started in which the number of prize balls increases by one at the second speed (in this example, 0.5 seconds).

  If the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set in step S517 or step S529 (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 determines the effect effect end timing and It is confirmed whether or not (step S533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect production is set, for example, when a timer for measuring the effect production period is set when the effect production is started in step S523, and the timer times out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to end the effect effect in the effect display device 9 (step S534).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the prize ball number display is completed (that is, whether or not 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1). (No) is confirmed (step S535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number counter after the prize ball number is increased by one. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S536). If the award ball number display after the award ball number has increased by 1 does not yet match the award ball number indicated by the award ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again uses the effect display device 9 to win the award ball at the second speed. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting the third prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S537). Then, control goes to a step S540.

  If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number increases by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the second KT pattern. Control for terminating the enlarged display of the number of prize balls is performed (step S538). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag (step S539), and ends the third prize ball increasing effect. Then, control goes to a step S540.

  In this modified example, when a winning to the special winning opening 24 occurs in the small hit game generated in the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30) and the prize is immediately given. Although 15 is added to the ball counter, the award ball number display is immediately updated to a value obtained by adding 15 by executing the processing of steps S510, S517, S529 to S532, and S535 to S359. Rather than effect presentation, the prize ball number display is enlarged and the prize ball is increased in increments of 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The number display is updated. Therefore, in this modification, in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds × 15 = 7.5 seconds until the update of all the 15 winning balls is completed for one winning in the special winning opening 24. The award ball number display is updated over time. In this case, there may be a case where a winning to the next special winning opening 24 occurs before the update of all 15 winning balls is completed. For example, 5 of 15 winning balls Even when the winning prize is displayed at the next special prize opening 24 at the stage where only the increase in the number of prize balls has been displayed up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls is continuously increased is displayed. The third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case) In addition, the award ball number display is updated over 15.0 seconds including the additional award ball number).

  Here, in the present modification, when the third prize-ball increasing effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is terminated. There is a case where the production in which all the number of prize balls increases until the end. In this variation, the prize ball number display process is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, regardless of whether the variable display is being executed, whether the big hit game or the small hit game, Since it is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, if the third prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the third prize ball increase effect continues over the variable display after the small hit game ends. (In addition, the third prize-ball increasing effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display interposed therebetween).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag is set (step S540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect, for example, when starting the winning effect in step S527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set and the timer has timed out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to end the winning effect in the effect display device 9 (step S542).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S544). Further, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to display a prize-ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) on the effect display device 9 (step S545), and starts the winning effect on the effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S546).

  If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effecting CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S547).

  In this modified example, when the process of steps S524 to S528 and S540 to S547 is executed, and a winning to the special winning opening 24 occurs during the second KT state, a prize-ball increase display is displayed. Winning effect is executed. In this case, there may be a case where a new winning to the next special prize opening 24 may occur during the execution of the winning effect. In such a case, the system waits until the winning effect being executed ends. The display of the next prize ball increase display and the prize presentation effect are executed after the winning prize effect being executed is finished (the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize presentation effect are executed with a delay).

  Here, in this modified example, since the display of the winning ball increase display and the winning effect may be executed with a delay, the display of all the winning ball increase displays and the winning effect are executed before the end of the small hit game. There are cases where it is not possible. In this variation, the prize ball number display process is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, regardless of whether the variable display is being executed, whether the big hit game or the small hit game, Since it is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, if the prize-ball increase display or winning effect is not finished during the small hit game, the prize-ball increase display is displayed over the variable display after the small hit game ends. Display and winning effect are executed (further, the display of winning ball increase display and winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games across the variable display).

  In this modification, the effect presentation is also executed when a prize is awarded to the special prize opening 24, but the effect presentation is immediately executed at the timing when the prize winning to the special prize opening 24 occurs ( Steps S523, S533, and S534).

  In this modification, the prize ball number display effect is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. You may comprise so that a prize-ball number display effect may be performed before performing.

  Further, in the present modification, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display or a winning effect is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening 24. For example, the special winning opening lamp 24a is further lit. You may comprise so that it may display.

  Further, in the present modification, a case is shown in which an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by one is executed by executing an effect of increasing the number of winning balls based on the occurrence of a winning at the special winning opening or the special winning opening 24. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a gaming machine configured to have a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening that does not open a variable winning ball apparatus even if a winning is made and only pays out a predetermined number (for example, five) winning balls) In this case, it may be configured to execute an effect in which a prize ball increasing effect is executed and the number of prize balls is increased by one even when a winning in a general winning opening occurs. In this case, when a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at a first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) is executed uniformly in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a win to the general prize opening occurs, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. You may perform a production that goes on. Even in the case of such a configuration, if the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), the prize-ball-increasing effect is produced even if a winning in the general winning opening occurs. May not be executed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect form of the prize ball increase effect in the present modification will be described. FIGS. 71 to 74 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of effect modes of prize ball increase effects. Among these, FIG. 71 shows a specific example of a production mode of a prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening during the big hit game. FIG. 72 shows a specific example of the effect form of the prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the winning of the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state. FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 show a specific example of the effect form of the prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 71-74, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (A) (B) (C) ....

  First, with reference to FIG. 71, a specific example of a production mode of a prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in a big winning opening during a big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (A), when the big hit game is being played, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 400 by the big hit pattern and, for example, the character 401 is displayed. A case where a character display 402 such as “Big hit!” Or the like is displayed as a line is shown. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 71, the prize ball number display 400 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 400 by the big hit pattern. .

  Next, it is assumed that a prize at the big prize opening occurs during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed on the effect display device 9, and a first prize ball increasing effect is executed (see steps S500 to S509). ). In the present modification, in the first prize ball increasing effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively fast speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 71 (C). When the update of the display of all the prize balls is finished, the first prize ball increase effect is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a specific example of the effect mode of the prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), in the first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the award ball number display 403 based on the first KT pattern, and when a small hit occurs, For example, a case where a character display 404 such as “occurrence of small hit!” Is displayed is shown. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 72, the prize ball number display 403 is displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 403 by the first KT pattern. Yes.

  Next, it is assumed that a winning to the special winning opening 24 occurs during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and a second prize ball increasing effect is executed (see steps S510 to S522). ). In this modified example, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively fast speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 72 (C). In addition, when the update of the display of all the prize balls is completed, the second prize ball increase effect is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, a specific example of the effect mode of a prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 73A, in the second KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 405 by the second KT pattern, and when a small hit occurs, For example, a case in which a character display 406 such as “Small hit!” Is displayed is shown. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, the prize ball number display 405 is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 405 by the second KT pattern. Has been.

  Next, it is assumed that a winning to the special winning opening 24 occurs during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the effect display is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 405 is started (see step S530). In the example shown in FIG. 73 (B), a case where a predetermined effect image 407 (for example, an image in a shining manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 405 is shown as an effect effect. . Further, when a winning at the special winning opening 24 occurs, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), a winning ball increase display is displayed (see step S526) and a winning effect is started (see step S527). In the example shown in FIG. 73 (B), an effect in which a predetermined character 408 is displayed as a winning effect is executed, and a character display 409 such as “+15” is displayed as a prize-ball increase display. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (C), the effect display device 9 starts an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (steps S510, S517, S529). To S539). In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 73 (C) to 74 (H), in the third prize ball increasing effect, the second speed is increased as compared with the first prize ball increasing effect and the second prize ball increasing effect. As a result, the award ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), it is assumed that the effect production has ended (the prize production has continued), and a new winning to the next special prize opening 24 has occurred during the execution of the prize production. And In this case, as shown in FIG. 74E, the effect display is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the display of the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

  Next, it is assumed that the effect effect has ended as shown in FIG. 74 (F), and that the prize effect has ended as shown in FIG. 74 (G). Then, when the winning effect is finished, based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), a winning ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S526). An effect is started (see step S527).

  Thereafter, the second prize ball increase effect is displayed until all the prize ball numbers are updated including the number of prize balls based on the prize winning to the special prize opening 24 additionally generated in FIG. 74 (E). Executed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the effect image 407 is displayed as a sparkling effect around the award-ball number display 405 as an effect presentation. Absent. For example, as an effect effect, an effect that affects the prize ball number display 405 in some form, such as an image that covers the prize ball number display 405, may be executed. By acting on the prize ball number display 405 as such, an effect that makes the prize ball number display 405 difficult to visually recognize may be executed.

  Further, in the present modification, the case where the number of prize balls obtained during the KT state is added to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit game and the prize ball number display is performed, but such a mode is limited. Instead, the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game and the number of prize balls obtained during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is being played, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the form shown in FIG. 71, and in the form shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9, or the second KT is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. The number of winning balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of winning balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately).

  Further, for example, (1) when the KT state is once ended and the big hit game is started, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the number of prize balls displayed during the big hit game is displayed. (2) The award ball number display of the number of award balls acquired during the KT state is continued until the KT state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-KT state. It may be configured. In addition, according to the aspect of (2), the interest with respect to a game can be improved by being able to recognize the acquired number of prize balls only in the KT state.

  Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 75 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated when the special prize opening 24 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S530). (Refer to) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first winning is started, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S510, S517, S529 to S539), and the effect effect is executed (step). (See S523). In addition, as shown in FIG. 75, a winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S527).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increasing effect or the winning effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect production is immediately executed, and the third prize ball increase production is continuously executed by taking over the number of prize balls increased by the second winning. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 75, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second winning is generated, the winning effect for the second winning is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. In addition, after the winning effect for the first winning is finished, the winning effect for the second winning is delayed.

  After that, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball apparatus 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hitting game is finished, the display of all prize balls is updated in the third prize ball increasing effect. If it is not finished or if all the winning effects are not finished, as shown in FIG. 75, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the change display after the end of the small hit game and further the next small hit game, The third prize ball increasing effect and the winning effect can be continuously executed.

  According to this modification, the count display (in this example, the number of winning balls) can be updated and displayed based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, a game ball has won a prize winning opening or special winning opening 24). And the first display mode (in this example, the winning ball number display by the big hit pattern) and the second display mode (in this example, the winning ball number display by the second KT pattern) to be highlighted than the first display mode. Thus, the count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 71, in the big hit pattern in the big hit gaming state, the prize ball number display 400 is updated and displayed at the lower left corner of the effect display device 9, 73 and 74, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the prize ball number display 405 is enlarged and displayed in the vicinity of the center of the effect display device 9 and the effect image 407 is displayed and updated). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of display modes for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when performing the update display of the count display.

  Further, according to the present modification, it is determined whether or not a predetermined opportunity (in this example, a game ball has won the special winning opening 24), and based on the determination that the predetermined opportunity has been reached. Thus, a winning effect (in this example, winning effects shown in FIGS. 73 and 74) can be executed. Further, the winning effect can be executed by the first pattern that immediately executes the winning effect based on the determination that the predetermined opportunity has been reached, and the second pattern that executes the winning effect at a timing later than the first pattern. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the special winning opening 24 is won, if the winning effect is not being executed, the winning effect is immediately executed and the special winning opening 24 is generated. If the winning effect is being executed at the time, the winning effect is executed with a delay). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of timings for executing the winning effects, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when executing the winning effects.

  In addition, according to this modification, the count display (in this example, the number of winning balls is displayed) is updated based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, a game ball has won a big winning opening or a special winning opening 24). It can be displayed. Also, a first pattern in which the period until the updated count result is displayed is the first pattern, and a second pattern in which the period until the updated count result is displayed is a second period longer than the first period. Thus, the count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, when the prize ball number display 400 is displayed in the big hit pattern, the prize ball number is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second). When displaying and displaying the prize ball number display 405 in the second KT pattern, the prize ball number is incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds). Therefore, by providing a plurality of patterns for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when performing the update display of the count display.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols, “1” to “9”, background symbols (production symbols), and normal symbols are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. The display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 4). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game is shown based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probable state after completion.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 9a 1st variable display part 9b 2nd variable display part 9c Background symbol display part 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 Second start winning opening 14a Second start opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Actuating gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Symbol holding memory display unit 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning port 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU
78 Movable member 80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player based on the execution of the variable display;
Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state with an increased frequency of being controlled to the special state;
A launch promotion notification means capable of executing a launch promotion notification for prompting a launch operation of the game medium to a predetermined route,
The firing promotion notification means includes
When the special state is controlled, the firing promotion notification can be executed according to a predetermined mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the firing promotion notification can be executed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode during execution of the variable display based on the variable display period being a predetermined period or longer.

Images